plm115 col52 nw

I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115Basic Data for Process

ManufacturingmySAP Product Lifecycle Management

Date

Training Center

Instructors

Education Website

Participant HandbookCourse Version: 2005 Q2Course Duration: 5 Day(s)Material Number: 50072154

An SAP course - use it to learn, reference it for work

Contact for Buying SAP Module Materials: [email protected] Visit: www.sapeducation.co.nr

I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Copyright

Copyright © 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without theexpress permission of SAP AG. The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice.

Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary softwarecomponents of other software vendors.

Trademarks

� Microsoft®, WINDOWS®, NT®, EXCEL®, Word®, PowerPoint® and SQL Server® areregistered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

� IBM®, DB2®, OS/2®, DB2/6000®, Parallel Sysplex®, MVS/ESA®, RS/6000®, AIX®, S/390®,AS/400®, OS/390®, and OS/400® are registered trademarks of IBM Corporation.

� ORACLE® is a registered trademark of ORACLE Corporation.� INFORMIX®-OnLine for SAP and INFORMIX® Dynamic ServerTM are registered trademarks

of Informix Software Incorporated.� UNIX®, X/Open®, OSF/1®, and Motif® are registered trademarks of the Open Group.� Citrix®, the Citrix logo, ICA®, Program Neighborhood®, MetaFrame®, WinFrame®,

VideoFrame®, MultiWin® and other Citrix product names referenced herein are trademarks ofCitrix Systems, Inc.

� HTML, DHTML, XML, XHTML are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C®, World WideWeb Consortium, Massachusetts Institute of Technology.

� JAVA® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.� JAVASCRIPT® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., used under license for

technology invented and implemented by Netscape.� SAP, SAP Logo, R/2, RIVA, R/3, SAP ArchiveLink, SAP Business Workflow, WebFlow, SAP

EarlyWatch, BAPI, SAPPHIRE, Management Cockpit, mySAP.com Logo and mySAP.com aretrademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in several other countries allover the world. All other products mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks of theirrespective companies.

Disclaimer

THESE MATERIALS ARE PROVIDED BY SAP ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, AND SAP EXPRESSLYDISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR APPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUTLIMITATION WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULARPURPOSE, WITH RESPECT TO THESE MATERIALS AND THE SERVICE, INFORMATION, TEXT,GRAPHICS, LINKS, OR ANY OTHER MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS CONTAINED HEREIN. INNO EVENT SHALL SAP BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,CONSEQUENTIAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER, INCLUDINGWITHOUT LIMITATION LOST REVENUES OR LOST PROFITS, WHICH MAY RESULT FROMTHE USE OF THESE MATERIALS OR INCLUDED SOFTWARE COMPONENTS.


I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

About This HandbookThis handbook is intended to complement the instructor-led presentation of thiscourse, and serve as a source of reference. It is not suitable for self-study.

Typographic ConventionsAmerican English is the standard used in this handbook. The following typographicconventions are also used.

Type Style Description

Example text Words or characters that appear on the screen. Theseinclude field names, screen titles, pushbuttons as well asmenu names, paths, and options.

Also used for cross-references to other documentationboth internal (in this documentation) and external (inother locations, such as SAPNet).

Example text Emphasized words or phrases in body text, titles ofgraphics, and tables

EXAMPLE TEXT Names of elements in the system. These include reportnames, program names, transaction codes, table names,and individual key words of a programming language,when surrounded by body text, for example SELECTand INCLUDE.

Example text Screen output. This includes file and directory namesand their paths, messages, names of variables andparameters, and passages of the source text of a program.

Example text Exact user entry. These are words and characters thatyou enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation.

<Example text> Variable user entry. Pointed brackets indicate that youreplace these words and characters with appropriateentries.

2005/Q2 © 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved. iii


I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

About This Handbook PLM115

Icons in Body TextThe following icons are used in this handbook.

Icon Meaning

For more information, tips, or background

Note or further explanation of previous point

Exception or caution

Procedures

Indicates that the item is displayed in the instructor�spresentation.

iv © 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2005/Q2


I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

ContentsCourse Overview ...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii

Course Goals.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .viiCourse Objectives .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii

Unit 1: Introduction ... .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1Process Manufacturing: Functions .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2Master Data for Process Manufacturing ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5

Unit 2: Materials ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Material Master Record ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Material Type .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Creating and Changing Material Master Records ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Field Selection .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Customized Material Master Record .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Unit 3: Aspects of the Classification System ...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Classification System ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80Classifying Objects for Process Manufacturing... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Unit 4: Aspects of Batch Management ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101Batches and Batch Management ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102Batch-Specific Material Units of Measure .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Batch Levels.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133

Unit 5: Resources ...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141Resources: Overview ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142Capacities .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153Formulas .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157Creating Resources and Further Maintenance Activities... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162

Unit 6: Production Version ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205Production Version - Overview... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206Maintaining Production Versions ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209

2005/Q2 © 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved. v


I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Contents PLM115

Unit 7: Master Recipes (I) ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227Master Recipes: Overview .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228Creating Header and Operation Data ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238

Unit 8: Master Recipes (II) ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273Materials in the Master Recipe.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274Creating BOM and Material List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277Material Quantity Calculation.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291Example Scenario for Material Quantity Calculation .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299

Unit 9: Master Recipes (III) .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313Process Management: Overview... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314Maintenance of Process Instructions ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317Reporting, Mass Processing and Copying .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351

Unit 10: Aspects of the Manufacture of Co-Products ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363Manufacture of Co-Products - Overview... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364Maintaining Material and BOM... .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367

Unit 11: Aspects of Quality Inspection During Production ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389Integration with Quality Management ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390In-Process Quality Inspection ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394

Unit 12: Engineering Change Management, Recipe Approval .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413Engineering Change Management - Overview ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414Changes with a Change Master Record.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418Recipe Approval .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429

Unit 13: Appendix ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463Material Costing... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464Integration of ECC and SCM (APO).. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467Basics of Recipe Management .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473

vi © 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2005/Q2


I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Course OverviewThis course will prepare you to maintain the master data required for process orders inthe SAP component ECC.

Software components and releases:

SAP Enterprise Core Component 5.0

Target AudienceThis course is intended for the following audiences:

� Members of project teams who are responsible for introducing the basic datafor process manufacturing (consultants, organizers)

� Managers and employees of the relevant departments

Course PrerequisitesRequired Knowledge

� SCM300 (Manufacturing Overview)

Recommended Knowledge

� SAPPLM (mySAP PLM Overview)� SAPPLM (mySAP SCM Overview)

2005/Q2 © 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved. vii


I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Course Overview PLM115

Course GoalsThis course will prepare you to:

� Maintaining the master data required for process orders in the SAP componentECC. This includes:

� Material masters and batches� Resources� Production versions� Master recipes and material BOMs

� Introduction to further aspects of master data maintenance for processmanufacturing:

� Using engineering change management and approving master recipes� Mapping the manufacture of co-products onto the system� Planning quality inspection during production

Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, you will be able to:

� Creating and managing materials, resources, production versions, master recipes,and material BOMs

� Using engineering change management for recipe approval� Mapping the manufacture of co-products onto the system� Mapping quality inspection during production onto the system� Making important system settings

SAP Software Component InformationThe information in this course pertains to the following SAP Software Componentsand releases:

� ECC 5.0

viii © 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2005/Q2


I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit 1Introduction

Unit OverviewThis chapter introduces you to the most important functions for mapping processproduction and the master data required for this.

Unit ObjectivesAfter completing this unit, you will be able to:

� Name the main functions for mapping process manufacturing onto the system� Name and explain the master data required for process manufacturing

Unit ContentsLesson: Process Manufacturing: Functions.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2Lesson: Master Data for Process Manufacturing .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5

Exercise 1: Master Data for Process Manufacturing .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

2005/Q2 © 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 1


I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit 1: Introduction PLM115

Lesson: Process Manufacturing: Functions

Lesson OverviewThis lesson provides an overview of the main functions for mapping processmanufacturing using SAP.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Name the main functions for mapping process manufacturing onto the system

Business ExampleYou will first get an overview of the main functions for mapping processmanufacturing onto the system using SAP.

Process Manufacturing: Functions

Figure 1: Process Manufacturing: Functions

2 © 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2005/Q2


I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Lesson: Process Manufacturing: Functions

The main areas providing functions for mapping process manufacturing (named PI onthe slide) onto the system are:

� ECC resource management: The PI-specific master data of resources describesall means of production and persons involved in the production process.

� ECC master recipe management: The PI-specific master data of masterrecipes describes the manufacture of one ore more materials in one productionrun without relating to a particular order. Master recipes are the basis for processorders.

� ECC process order management: Process orders are created on the basis ofmaster recipes. They describe and monitor the actual production process.

� ECC process management coordinates the data exchange with the processcontrol level. Process management can be used in fully automated, partiallyautomated and manually operated plants.

Production planning and control is, for example, integrated with:

� ECC quality management . Using a special interface, external laboratoryinformation systems (LIMS) can be linked to ECC QM.

� Planning levels preceding production (system ECC and/or system SCM)� The master data and functions of ECC Materials Management (such asmaterial,

inventory management)

The APO Core Interface (CIF) allows ECC master data to be transferred to the SCMsystem.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Name the main functions for mapping process manufacturing onto the system



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Lesson: Master Data for Process Manufacturing

Lesson: Master Data for Process Manufacturing

Lesson OverviewThis lesson provides an overview of the master data required for process manufacturing


� Name and explain the master data required for process manufacturing

Business ExampleFind out about the master data required for process manufacturing:

� Material and batch� Resource� Production version� Master recipe� Material BOM

Master Data

Figure 2: Master Data



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Master Data for Process Manufacturing (ECC)

Figure 3: Master Data for Process Manufacturing (ECC)

Master data is data in the SAP system that remains unchanged over an extendedperiod of time. It contains information that is used in the same manner for similarobjects.

The material is the central master record in Logistics. In general, SAP defines amaterial as a substance or commodity that is bought or sold on a commercial basis, oris used, consumed or created in production.

A batch is a subset of a material with unique specifications. The batches of onematerial are managed in separate stocks. With regard to the production process, abatch is a quantity of a material produced in a given production run. This quantity,therefore, represents a non-reproducible unit with unique specifications.

The resourcemaster data describes the means of production in the production process.

A production version determines which alternative BOM is used together withwhich master recipe for process order production.

The master data ofmaster recipes describes the manufacture of one or more materialsin one production run without relating to a particular order.

Material BOMs are used to represent the structure of products that a companymanufactures. They are usually created and maintained from within the master recipe(integrated maintenance).



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Material

Figure 4: Material

Batch

Figure 5: Batch

In the SAP system, batches always depend on the corresponding materials. Batchesare created for a material.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Resource

Figure 6: Resource



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Production Version

Figure 7: Production Version

Master Recipe

Figure 8: Master Recipe



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


A master recipe defines the following data that is required for the production ofmaterials without relating to a particular order: processing steps, resources, materialcomponents, data for quality inspection during production, and control informationfor the process control level.

The master recipe is the basis for the creation of process orders. A process orderdescribes an actual production process and contains, for example, production datesand quantities to be produced.

A control recipe contains all the information necessary for the execution of a processorder by a certain process control system or process operator. Control recipes aregenerated from the process instructions in a process order and transferred to thecorresponding destination in process control. Process instructions are defined in themaster recipe on which the process order is based.

Material BOM

Figure 9: Material BOM

Bill of material (BOM): A complete, fully structured list of the components that makeup a product or assembly. The list contains the object number of each componenttogether with the quantity and unit of measure.

Material BOMs are used to represent the structure of products that a companymanufactures. You create material BOMs with reference to a material master record.The BOM can comprise items of various item categories, such as stock item,non-stock item, document item, text item.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Material BOMs are usually created and maintained from within the master recipe(integrated maintenance).

Material BOM data is, for example, important for:

� Material requirements planning� Material staging during production� Product costing

Process Manufacturing: Data Flow

Figure 10: Process Manufacturing: Data Flow

Production requirements trigger the production process. Production requirements arecreated in material requirements planning in the form of planned orders. Plannedorders define the basic dates and planned quantities for production.

During process planning, planned orders are converted into process orders. Thebasic dates and production quantities are copied from the planned order. The actualproduction dates are calculated using the basic dates. You can also create processorders manually.

A process order provides a detailed description of the actual production of one ormore materials in one production run. It is the main control instrument in production,describing and monitoring all planned and actual data relating to production.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


A master recipe is used as the basis for a process order. It defines, for example, theplanned resources and material components.

After a process order has been released for production, process management bundlesthe process instructions maintained in the order into control recipes. The controlrecipes are either transferred to a process control system using a specific interface orare displayed online in the form of a process instruction sheet (PI sheet) that can beread and maintained by process operators.

Process management in turn receives process messages from the process controllevel and forwards them to various destinations. For instance, it is possible to recordconfirmations for the process order, transfer actual values of the process to functionsfor process data documentation and evaluation, post material consumptions orproduction yields as goods movements and transfer quality data to results recording inQM.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Exercise 1: Master Data for ProcessManufacturing

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Log on to the system� Navigate in the process manufacturing menu paths

Business ExampleYour company is a process manufacturing enterprise.

You belong to the project team that is implementing the basic data for the processmanufacturing functions in the SAP ECC component.

The basic data that you will define covers materials, batches, resources, andproduction versions with master recipes and material BOMs.

You will first get an overview of the main functions for mapping processmanufacturing onto the system using SAP and the master data required for this.

Task 1:Logging on to the systems:

Hint: Your instructor provides the information required for logging on.

1. Logging on to the PC

USER:

PASSWORD:

Logging on to ECC system

CLIENT:

USER:

PASSWORD:

LANGUAGE: EN

Continued on next page



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Task 2:Overview of the functions of process manufacturing

1. Use the course material to get an overview of the functional areas for mappingprocess manufacturing.

In addition, get an overview of the relevant menu paths in the ECC system.

Task 3:Overview of the master data for process manufacturing

1. Use the course material to get an overview of the master data for processmanufacturing.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Solution 1: Master Data for ProcessManufacturingTask 1:Logging on to the systems:

Hint: Your instructor provides the information required for logging on.

1. Logging on to the PC

USER:

PASSWORD:

Logging on to ECC system

CLIENT:

USER:

PASSWORD:

LANGUAGE: EN

a) No information required.

Task 2:Overview of the functions of process manufacturing

1. Use the course material to get an overview of the functional areas for mappingprocess manufacturing.


a) Overview of the functions of process manufacturing

SAP Menu→ Logistics→ Production � Process→ (...)

Task 3:Overview of the master data for process manufacturing

1. Use the course material to get an overview of the master data for processmanufacturing.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y



a) Overview of the master data for process manufacturing

SAP Menu→ Logistics→ Production � Process→ Master Data→ (...)



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Name and explain the master data required for process manufacturing



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit Summary PLM115

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:� Name the main functions for mapping process manufacturing onto the system� Name and explain the master data required for process manufacturing



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Test Your Knowledge

Test Your Knowledge

1. Name the main functional areas for mapping process manufacturing

2. Name the main functional areas for mapping the required master data.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Test Your Knowledge PLM115

Answers

1. Name the main functional areas for mapping process manufacturing

Answer:

� Resource management� Master recipe management� Process order management� Process management

2. Name the main functional areas for mapping the required master data.

Answer:

� Material� Batch� Resource� Production version� Master recipe� Material BOM



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit 2Materials

Unit OverviewThis chapter introduces you to material master records.


� Explain the structure of a material master record.� Create and maintain material types� Create and maintain material master records� Set up field selection for material masters� Set up screen sequence control for material masters

Unit ContentsLesson: Material Master Record .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Lesson: Material Type... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Exercise 2: Material and Material Type... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Lesson: Creating and Changing Material Master Records .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Exercise 3: Creating and Changing Material Master Records.. . . . . . . . . . . . 45Lesson: Field Selection ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Exercise 4: Field Selection .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Lesson: Customized Material Master Record... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Exercise 5: Customized Material Master Record .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit 2: Materials PLM115

Lesson: Material Master Record

Lesson OverviewThis lesson introduces you to the definition and the structure of a material masterrecord.


� Explain the structure of a material master record.

Business ExampleFind out about the structure of material master records

Material and Material Master Record: Definition

MaterialSubstance or commodity that is bought or sold on a commercial basis, or is used,consumed, or created in production.

Material master recordA data record containing all the basic information required to manage amaterial.The data is sorted according to various criteria including data of a descriptivenature and data with control functions.It is sorted according to different criteria.

Materials are created as material master records.

A material master record contains data of a descriptive nature (such as size, dimension,weight) and data with control functions (such as material type).

In addition to this data, which the user can maintain, the material master record alsocontains data that is automatically updated by the system (such as stock levels).

An alphanumeric material number identifies a material master record in the system.This material number is unique at the client level.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Lesson: Material Master Record

Material Master Record: Views

Figure 11: Material Master Record: Views

Each department of a company needs to maintain different information on a material.Therefore, the material master record comprises different views.

A view groups all data on a material created by a particular department (such asPurchasing, MRP, Work scheduling) in the master record.

The views shown to the left are the minimum material master views that must bemaintained for in-house production. The additional views to the right are typical forprocess manufacturing.

In accordance with their different usages, the materials of a company are groupedtogether in material types. For each material type you specify, for example, whichviews of a material master record can be accessed.

Master record data is assigned to different organizational levels of the SAP ECCsystem. When maintaining specific views, you must therefore enter the organizationalunits (such as plant, storage location, and purchasing organization) for which youwant to maintain the data.

For each user, you can specify which views of the material master record may bemaintained or displayed.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Organizational Levels in ECC

Figure 12: Organizational Levels in ECC

Organization levels in ECC serve as hierarchical representations of the legaland/or organizational structure of an enterprise. They form a framework thatsupports all business activities and enable you to design your company structurebased on your business processes.

The client represents the highest organizational level. A client is a self-containedunit in an SAP system with separate master records and its own set of tables. Aclient is, for example, a group of companies with several subsidiaries. The companydata of an SAP installation is differentiated according to clients and usually alsoaccording to lower organizational levels.

The controlling area is an organizational unit in accounting used for costing.

A company code represents an independent accounting unit, for example, a companywithin a corporate group. Each company code contains one self-contained set ofbooks. Balance sheets and profit and loss statements, required by law, are created atthe company code level.

Within production planning and control, the plant is the central organizationalunit. A plant is a production facility or a facility used to group storage locations. Aplant is a unit performing material requirements planning and inventory management.Therefore, it is an important organizational element for materials management.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Within a plant, material stocks can be managed separately for different storagelocations (inventory management).

The valuation area represents the organizational level at which material quantitiesand values can be managed. For order and product costing, a separate valuationarea must exist for each plant.

Organizational Levels and Material Master Data

Figure 13: Organizational Levels and Material Master Data

Some material data is valid at all organizational levels, while other data is onlyvalid at certain levels. The material master is designed in a way that it reflects thehierarchical structure of the company and it can be maintained centrally without dataredundancy. The material master record information is organized in a hierarchicalfashion, according to organizational levels.

Master record data is assigned to different organizational levels of the SAP ECCsystem. When maintaining specific views, you must therefore enter the organizationalunits (such as plant, storage location, and purchasing organization) for which youwant to maintain the data.

Data at client level: This level contains material data that commonly applies to alllower levels of a client. This includes material descriptions, base units of measure,alternative units of measure, weight, volume, and classification data. This data isaccessed using the material number.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Data at plant level: This level contains material data that applies to a particular plant.To access the plant data, a plant number must be specified along with the materialnumber. To create a bill of material and a master recipe at least one plant level viewmust exist for the material master.

Data at storage location level: This level contains material data that applies to aparticular storage location. To access the storage location data, you need to specify theplant number and the storage location number along with the material number.

Material Master Record: Navigation and Maintenance

Figure 14: Material Master Record: Navigation and Maintenance

To maintain a material, you enter the material number on the initial screen. You thenselect the organizational levels and views of the main data screens.

The data screens on the main level are displayed in a standard sequence defined inCustomizing. However, you can jump from screen to screen and thus interrupt thestandard sequence.

To reach the additional data screens, choose the Additional Data pushbutton fromwithin the corresponding view.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Explain the structure of a material master record.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson: Material Type

Lesson OverviewThis lesson introduces you to material types.


� Create and maintain material types

Business ExampleYou are to create enterprise-specific material types.

Material Type

� When creating a material master record, the material must be assigned toa material type.

� Material types

� are used for summarizing materials with the same basic attributes.

for example, raw materials, semi-finished products or finished products

� Determine certain attributes of the material and have important controlfunctions

Within a company, different materials are used for different purposes. Materialmaster records must therefore meet different requirements with regard to views to bemaintained and control of certain business transactions.

To be able to manage different materials in the same way according to the company'srequirements, materials with the same attributes are divided into groups and given amaterial type.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Lesson: Material Type

Control Using Material Type

Figure 15: Control Using Material Type



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


The material type controls, for example:

� The field selection and screen sequence for material master maintenance� The access to material data by means of authorization groups� Whether a material number can be assigned internally and/or externally� From which number range interval the material number is taken� Whether externally assigned material numbers are checked against a number

range� How the material item category for SD documents is determined� Whether material costing is to take place with or without a quantity structure� Whether the initial status of a material batch is to be Unrestricted or Restricted� Whether the material is intended for a special purpose (for example, as a

configurable material or process material)� Which procurement type is assigned to the material. This means whether the

material is intended for external procurement (external purchase order) and/orin-house production (internal purchase order).

� Which user department data can be entered, that is, which views are allowed formaterial maintenance

� Price control� The determination of G/L accounts to be updated in valuation-relevant

transactions (for example, goods movement)

In conjunction with the plant the material type determines the inventory managementrequirement of the material, that is:

� Whether quantity changes are updated in the material master record� Whether value changes are also updated in balance sheet accounts in financial

accounting



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Material Types in the Standard System: Examples

Figure 16: Material Types in the Standard System: Examples

The graphic shows the main settings for some of the material types available in thestandard system (FERT: finished product; HALB: semi-finished product; ROH: rawmaterial; PIPE: pipeline material; PROC: process material; INTR: intra material).

The material types most frequently used in production planning and control includeFERT, HALB and ROH.

If required, you can define your own material types.

Changing material types:

� You can change the material type without restrictions if no stocks, reservations,or purchasing documents exist for the material.

� If stocks, reservations, or purchasing documents exist, you can only change thematerial type provided that:

� The same G/L account is used� The same quantities and values are updated



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Industry Sector

� When creating a material master record, the material must be assigned to anindustry sector.

� An industry sector:

� Specifies the branch of industry to which the material is assigned, forexample, chemical industry, pharmaceuticals, food

� Influences the screen selection and screen sequence for material mastermaintenance



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Exercise 2: Material and Material Type

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Create and maintain material masters� Describe the functions of material types

Business ExampleIn a first step of master data maintenance, you must:

� Create material master records

and

� Define your own material types if required

Task 1:Material Master Record: Navigation and Maintenance

1. Go to the following material master in change or display mode:

Material: T-FJ1##

2. Select view(s):

Which views have been maintained for the material?

Choose the Basic Data view and some other views.

3. Organizational levels:

Use the input help (F4) to select a plant and storage location.

4. Navigate through the material master views you selected.

Then go to views that you have not selected when accessing the material master.

5. Navigate to the additional data level.

Which alternative units of measure have been maintained, for example?

6. Display the administrative data (information on material).

For which industry sector and material type was the material created?

Which users have created or changed which views and when?




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Task 2:Settings for material types

Display the material types defined in Customizing for finished products, semi-finishedproducts, raw materials, and pipeline materials.

Caution: Make sure you do not change the data in Customizing. Exit theCustomizing view without saving when you have completed the exercise.

1. Write down the settings for the parameters in the following table:

Parameters Finishedproduct

Semi-finishedProduct

Rawmaterial

Pipelinematerial

Material typeAre internalordersallowed?Are externalordersallowed?Which fieldsare selectedin the Userdepartmentsgroup box?

Workscheduling?Accounting?MRP?Purchasing?Costing?




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y




Rawmaterial

Pipelinematerial

Sales?Which pricecontrol is set?Does aquantity andvalue updatetake place forthe materialtype?

2. Which function does the field �External no. assignment w/o check have�?

3. Which function does the �With Qty Structure� field have?

Task 3:Creating a new material type

1. a) Create a new

Material type PI## Material Type Group ##

as a copy of

(Template) material type HALB semi-finished product.

b) Notice the following about the new material type:

- External and internal orders are allowed.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


- Externally assigned material numbers are checked against a number range.

- Material costing with a quantity structure (BOM, task list) is defined.

- For materials of this material type, the following user departments may bemaintained:

Work scheduling CostingAccounting Basic dataClassification Plant stocksMRP Storage location stocksPurchasing

- In all valuation areas, quantities and values are to be updated for materialsof this material type.

- All materials of this material (not changeable) are to be valuated accordingto the moving average price.

- Account assignment is to take place according to account class reference 0008,in the same way as for material type HALB.

Save the material type.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Solution 2: Material and Material TypeTask 1:Material Master Record: Navigation and Maintenance

1. Go to the following material master in change or display mode:

Material: T-FJ1##

a) (...) → Material Master→ Material→ Display→ Display Current

2. Select view(s):

Which views have been maintained for the material?

Choose the Basic Data view and some other views.

a) The view selection contains the views that have been created for thematerial so far.

3. Organizational levels:

Use the input help (F4) to select a plant and storage location.

a) See exercise

4. Navigate through the material master views you selected.

Then go to views that you have not selected when accessing the material master.

a) You can use the Enter key to navigate through the views selected.

By choosing the relevant tab page, you can navigate to the views youdid not select on the initial screen.

5. Navigate to the additional data level.

Which alternative units of measure have been maintained, for example?

a) Choose the Additional Data and then the Units of Measure tab.

6. Display the administrative data (information on material).

For which industry sector and material type was the material created?

Which users have created or changed which views and when?

a) Choose the i button (Information on Material).




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Task 2:Settings for material types

Display the material types defined in Customizing for finished products, semi-finishedproducts, raw materials, and pipeline materials.

Caution: Make sure you do not change the data in Customizing. Exit theCustomizing view without saving when you have completed the exercise.

1. Write down the settings for the parameters in the following table:



Rawmaterial

Pipelinematerial

Material type FERT HALB ROH PIPEAre internalordersallowed?

Yes Yes No No

Are externalordersallowed?

Allowed withwarning

Yes Yes No

Which fieldsare selectedin the Userdepartmentsgroup box?

Workscheduling?

Yes Yes No No

Accounting? Yes Yes Yes YesMRP? Yes Yes Yes NoPurchasing? Yes Yes Yes YesCosting? Yes Yes Yes No




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y




Rawmaterial

Pipelinematerial

Sales? Yes Yes No NoWhich pricecontrol is set?

Standard price Standardprice

Movingaverage price

Movingaverage price

Does aquantity andvalue updatetake place forthe materialtype?

Depends onvaluation area

Dependsonvaluationarea

Depends onvaluationarea

In none ofthe valuationareas

a) SAP Menu→ Tools→ Customizing→ IMG → Execute Project /Pushbutton SAP Reference IMG

SAP Customizing Implementation Guide→ Logistics - General→ MaterialMaster→ Basic Settings→ Material Types→ Define Attributes ofMaterial Types.

Double-click the relevant material type.

2. Which function does the field �External no. assignment w/o check have�?

Answer: Choose F1 on the field.If the indicator is set, the material number can be assigned externally withoutbeing compared with the number range for the material type.

3. Which function does the �With Qty Structure� field have?

Answer: Choose F1 on the field.This field is used to control whether material costing is carried out with orwithout a quantity structure (BOM and task list).

Task 3:Creating a new material type

1. a) Create a new

Material type PI## Material Type Group ##

as a copy of

(Template) material type HALB semi-finished product.Continued on next page



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


b) Notice the following about the new material type:

- External and internal orders are allowed.

- Externally assigned material numbers are checked against a number range.

- Material costing with a quantity structure (BOM, task list) is defined.

- For materials of this material type, the following user departments may bemaintained:

Work scheduling CostingAccounting Basic dataClassification Plant stocksMRP Storage location stocksPurchasing

- In all valuation areas, quantities and values are to be updated for materialsof this material type.

- All materials of this material (not changeable) are to be valuated accordingto the moving average price.

- Account assignment is to take place according to account class reference 0008,in the same way as for material type HALB.

Save the material type.

a) Creating a new material type

Customizing (...) → Logistics - General→ Material Master→ BasicSettings→ Material Types→ Define Attributes of Material Types

b) Select material type HALB

Copy as... icon

Overwrite material type HALB with new material type PI##

Make further settings as described.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Create and maintain material types



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson: Creating and Changing Material Master Records

Lesson OverviewThis lesson introduces you to the creation and maintenance of material master records.


� Create and maintain material master records

Business ExampleYou create the material master records required for the materials in your company.

Creating a Material Master Record

Figure 17: Creating a Material Master Record



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Lesson: Creating and Changing Material Master Records

Figure 18: Extending a Material Master Record

Figure 19: Functions of Material Master Maintenance



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Exercise 3: Creating and Changing MaterialMaster Records

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Create material master records

Business ExampleYou create material master records that are required for the example scenario of thecourse.

Task 1:Default settings for industry sectors and organizational levels

1. To make entering data easier, define default data for the industry sector andorganizational level before you create your material master records.

Choose:

Industry sector: Chemical industry

You want to hide the industry sector on the initial screen.

Organizational levels

Plant: 1100

Copy from

Plant: 1100

You want to display the organizational levels only on request.

Task 2:Creating material master records

1. Raw Material

Create the following material of material type ROH Raw material by copyingthe material given in the table below:




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Material Material type Copy fromT-RD1## Raw Material T-RD100

On the Select View(s) screen, select all of the views.

Set the Create views selected indicator.

On the Basic Data 1 screen, check the following description for your material:

Material Material descriptionT-RD1## Sulfuric acid

Save your material master record.

2. Finished product

Create material T-FD1## of material type FERT Finished product by copyingthe reference material T-FD100:

Material Material type Copy fromT-FD1## Finished product T-FD100



On the Basic Data 1 screen, store the following description for your material:

Material Material descriptionT-FD1## Detergent, group ##


Task 3:Displaying material master records

1. Display the following materials.

What type of materials are they and which material types are assigned to them?




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Material Industry sector Material type Materialdescription

T-RD2##T-RD3##T-RD4##T-RD5##

These materials will be used for the production of the finished product T-FD1##along with the raw material you created in exercise 1-1.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Solution 3: Creating and Changing MaterialMaster RecordsTask 1:Default settings for industry sectors and organizational levels

1. To make entering data easier, define default data for the industry sector andorganizational level before you create your material master records.

Choose:


You want to hide the industry sector on the initial screen.

Organizational levels

Plant: 1100

Copy from

Plant: 1100




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


You want to display the organizational levels only on request.

a) Default settings for industry sectors and organizational levels

SAP Menu→ Logistics→ Production - Process→ Master Data→Material Master→ Material→ Create (General)→ Immediately

Enter material type, such as ROH Raw material.

Enter industry section, such as Chemical industry

Settings→ Industry sector.


Hide industry sector on initial screen

Settings→ Organizational levels...

Plant: 1100

Template Plant: 1100

Organizational levels/profiles on request only

Hint: You can also maintain the user settings in Customizing:(...) Logistics - General→ Material Master→ Configuring theMaterial Master→ Maintain User Settings.

Task 2:Creating material master records

1. Raw Material

Create the following material of material type ROH Raw material by copyingthe material given in the table below:

Material Material type Copy fromT-RD1## Raw Material T-RD100



On the Basic Data 1 screen, check the following description for your material:




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Material Material descriptionT-RD1## Sulfuric acid


a) Raw Material

(�)→ Material Master→ Material→ Create - General→ Immediately

b) Select all in the view selection.

Create selected views indicator

2. Finished product

Create material T-FD1## of material type FERT Finished product by copyingthe reference material T-FD100:

Material Material type Copy fromT-FD1## Finished product T-FD100



On the Basic Data 1 screen, store the following description for your material:

Material Material descriptionT-FD1## Detergent, group ##


a) Finished product

(�)→ Material Master→ Material→ Create - General→ Immediately

b) Select all in the view selection.

Create selected views indicator

Task 3:Displaying material master records

1. Display the following materials.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


What type of materials are they and which material types are assigned to them?


T-RD2##T-RD3##T-RD4##T-RD5##

These materials will be used for the production of the finished product T-FD1##along with the raw material you created in exercise 1-1.

a)


T-RD2## C ROH Lauryl AlcoholT-RD3## C PIPE WaterT-RD4## C ROH 1-ButanolT-RD5## C ROH Sodium

hydroxide



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Create and maintain material master records



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Lesson: Field Selection

Lesson: Field Selection

Lesson OverviewThis lesson introduces you to the settings for the field selection for material masterrecords.


� Set up field selection for material masters

Business ExampleFor special material types you have to set up the field selection of material masterrecords enterprise-specifically.

Field Selection: Influencing Factors

Figure 20: Field Selection: Influencing Factors



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Field Selection: Influencing Factors and Field References

Figure 21: Field Selection: Influencing Factors and Field References

Each influencing factor is assigned its own field reference for field selection.

You can set or define field references for the material type, plant, and industrysector.

The field references for the other influencing factors are predefined.

Field Selection: Field Selection Group

Figure 22: Field Selection: Field Selection Group

Material master fields are grouped in field selection groups.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Field Selection: Field Selection Groups and FieldReferences

Figure 23: Field Selection: Field Selection Groups and Field References

All field selection groups are assigned to all field references.

The field options (hide, display, required entry, optional entry) are defined for eachfield selection group and field reference.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Field Selection: Link Rules

Figure 24: Field Selection: Link Rules

The field selection is determined by the field references of several influencingfactors (material type,

plant, ...) .

The field references define the field options (hide, show, required entry, optionalentry) for the individual field selection groups.

The entries of all field options for the relevant operation are linked to one anotherfor each field selection group.

The link rules shown in the graphic determine which fields are selected for a fieldselection group.

In order of priority, the signs mean the following:

- Hide

* Show

+ Required entry

. Optional entry



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Exercise 4: Field Selection

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Set up field selection for material masters

Business ExampleFor special material types you have to set up the field selection of material masterrecords enterprise-specifically.

Task:Field selection settings for the material type

The following fields are to be Required Entries for materials of material type PI##:

Old material number (MARA-BISMT)Material status (cross-plant) (MARA-MSTAE)

1. To which field selection groups do these fields belong?

MARA-BISMT: ___

MARA-MSTAE: ___

2. Which fields belong to these groups?

Field selection group 11: _______________


3. Create your own

Field selection reference Z##

as a copy of

Field selection reference HALB

Specify for field selection reference Z## that the above fields are requiredentry fields.

Save your settings.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


4. Assign the field reference Z## to your material type PI##.

5. Test your settings, for example by creating the basic data views for

Material T-PI## of

material type PI##

Note which views the system displays.

Note that the above fields now require an entry.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Solution 4: Field SelectionTask:Field selection settings for the material type

The following fields are to be Required Entries for materials of material type PI##:

Old material number (MARA-BISMT)Material status (cross-plant) (MARA-MSTAE)

1. To which field selection groups do these fields belong?

MARA-BISMT: ___

MARA-MSTAE: ___

a) Determining the field selection groups:

Customizing: Logistics - General→Material Master→ Field Selection→Assign Fields to Field Selection Groups

→Goto→ Position Cursor ...

MARA-BISMT: Field selection group 11

MARA-MSTAE: Field selection group 155

2. Which fields belong to these groups?



a) Customizing: Logistics - General→ Material Master→ Field Selection→ Maintain Field Selection for Data Screens

Enter field selection group 11 in the relevant field and choose Enter toconfirm.

Only the MARA-BISMT field belongs to field selection group 11.

Now enter field selection group 155.

The MARA-MSTAE field and the MARA-MSTDE field belong to group155.

3. Create your own

Field selection reference Z##




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


as a copy of

Field selection reference HALB

Specify for field selection reference Z## that the above fields are requiredentry fields.

Save your settings.

a) Select the line for field reference HALB and choose Edit→ Copy As...

Overwrite the reference HALB with your target reference Z## and chooseEnter to confirm.

Now set the Reqd entry indicator for the field selection groups 11 and115 for your field reference Z##.

Save your settings.

4. Assign the field reference Z## to your material type PI##.

a) Customizing: Logistics - General→ Material Master→ Basic Settings→Material Types→ Define Attributes of Material Types

Select your material type PI## and choose Goto→ Details.

Field reference: Z##

Save your settings.

5. Test your settings, for example by creating the basic data views for

Material T-PI## of

material type PI##

Note which views the system displays.

Note that the above fields now require an entry.

a) See exercise description



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Set up field selection for material masters



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson: Customized Material Master Record

Lesson OverviewThis lesson introduces you to the settings for the screen sequence control for materialmaster records.


� Set up screen sequence control for material masters

Business ExampleFor special material types and user groups you have to set up the screen sequencecontrol of material master records enterprise-specifically.

Customized Material Master

Figure 25: Customized Material Master

Customized material masters support sufficient data maintenance by creating entrydialogs specific to your company's data requirements.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Lesson: Customized Material Master Record

The material master is a set of logical screens organized in a specific sequence whenmore than one view is selected. This organization of logical screens is referred toas a screen sequence.

Each logical screen consists of several programmed sets of material master fields. InECC these are called screen modules or subscreens. The field assignments to ascreen module cannot be changed in Customizing.

In Customizing for the Material Master you can:

� Maintain screen sequences and screens� Control the selection of a screen sequence using the influencing factors.

Configuring Customized Material Masters

Figure 26: Configuring Customized Material Masters

Additional notes:

When you create your logical screens, we recommend using the standard screenmodules that already exist.

You need your own screen modules if you require non-standard field groupingsor new fields.

To create your own screen modules, copy the standard program SAPLMGD1 intoyour own function group (for instructions, see IMG). Then you can create thesubscreens you require in the new function group.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Append structures are defined in the Data Dictionary so that you can integrate yourown fields.

You can only integrate fields from user-specific tables and user-specific subsreencontainers in the SAPLMGMM program by using modifications.

You have to use the Implementation Guide to create your own material masterdialogs.

Influencing Factors for Screen Sequences

Figure 27: Influencing Factors for Screen Sequences

You can create one screen reference per user, material type, and industry sector.

The screen references for transactions are predefined.

The screen sequence becomes valid for the appropriate user, material types, andindustry sectors by assigning a combination of screen references to a screensequence.

In the example in the graphic, the screen sequence 01 would be valid for all users whoare assigned to the �MU� reference, irrespective of industry sector and material type.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Exercise 5: Customized Material MasterRecord

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Set up screen sequence control for material masters

Business ExampleFor special material types and user groups you have to set up the screen sequencecontrol of material master records enterprise-specifically.

Task:Creating a customized material master

1. Set up a

user-specific screen sequence Y# or Z# screen sequence grp.##

for material master maintenance.

Caution: Agree on the number with the other course participants!

Use

screen sequence 21 Ind-Std short TabStrips

as the template.

2. From data screen 08 (Basic data 2) module Environment (2010) is to becopied to data screen 07 (Basic data 1). Then delete data screen 08 and calldata screen 07 Basic data.

3. Set up the following order of screens for your screen sequence Y## or Z##,for example:

1. Screen 1 Basic data

2. Screens Material requirements planning 1 - 4

3. Screen 1 Work scheduling

4. Screens General plant data/storage 1 -2

5. Screen 1 Classification




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


The remaining sequence is not to be changed.

4. The screen sequence is to be valid for your user PI-## (or the user with whichyour logged on to the system).

Define a screen reference for your user (suggestion: call the screen referencewith reference to your screen sequence number). Define a new screen sequencecontrol for this screen reference for all material types and sectors of industry.

5. Check your settings by displaying, for example, the material master recordT-RD2##.

Caution: Undo the changes from exercise part 4 with regard thefollowing exercises.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Solution 5: Customized Material MasterRecordTask:Creating a customized material master

1. Set up a

user-specific screen sequence Y# or Z# screen sequence grp.##

for material master maintenance.

Caution: Agree on the number with the other course participants!

Use

screen sequence 21 Ind-Std short TabStrips

as the template.

a) Customizing: Logistics - General→ Material Master→ Configuring theMaterial Master→ Define Structure of Data Screens for Each ScreenSequence

Select the line for the screen sequence 21 and choose Edit→ Copy As...

Overwrite the reference sequence HALB with your target reference Y# orZ# and choose Enter to confirm.

Save your screen sequence.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


2. From data screen 08 (Basic data 2) module Environment (2010) is to becopied to data screen 07 (Basic data 1). Then delete data screen 08 and calldata screen 07 Basic data.

a) Select your screen sequence and double-click Data screens in the dialogstructure.

Select data screen 08 Basic data 2 and double-click Subscreens in thedialog structure.

Choose View data screen. Take a look at the simulation of the logicalscreen. Choose Cancel to exit the simulation.

Now select the subscreen with the Screen number 2010 and choose ViewSubscreen. The screen module Environment is displayed. Again, chooseCancel to exit the simulation.

Go to the Change View: Data Screens: Overview screen by double-clickingData Screens in the dialog structure.

Select data screen 07 Basic data 1 and double-click Subscreens in thedialog structure.

Add the screen module Environment to this data screen by overwriting thescreen number 0001 (= empty screen module) with the number 2010.

Choose View data screen. The screen module Environment is now copiedto the data screen Basic data 1. Choose Cancel to exit the simulation.

Double-click Data screens in the dialog structure. Select data screen 08Basic data 2 and choose Edit→ Delete.

Change the screen description and the alternative screen description ofdata screen 07 to Basic Data.

Save your changes.

3. Set up the following order of screens for your screen sequence Y## or Z##,for example:

1. Screen 1 Basic data

2. Screens Material requirements planning 1 - 4

3. Screen 1 Work scheduling

4. Screens General plant data/storage 1 -2

5. Screen 1 Classification




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


The remaining sequence is not to be changed.

a) Customizing: Logistics - General→ Material Master→ Configuring theMaterial Master→ Maintain the Order of Main Screen and AdditionalScreens

Select your screen sequence and choose Goto→ Details.

Assign ascending numbers to the screens MRP 1-4, Work Scheduling,and Gen. Plant Data / Storage 1-2 in this order so that their numbers arebetween the numbers for data screen Basic Data and Classification.

Example :

MRP 1→ No.: 11

MRP 2→ No.: 12

MRP 3→ No.: 13 and so on

Choose Sort Main Screens. The screens are put in a new order.

Save your changes.

4. The screen sequence is to be valid for your user PI-## (or the user with whichyour logged on to the system).




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Define a screen reference for your user (suggestion: call the screen referencewith reference to your screen sequence number). Define a new screen sequencecontrol for this screen reference for all material types and sectors of industry.

a) Customizing: Logistics - General→ Material Master→ Configuringthe Material Master→ Assign Screen Sequences to User/MaterialType/Transaction/Industry Sector

Double-click User screen reference in the dialog structure and then chooseNew Entries.

Enter the user name PI-## (or the user with which you are logged on tothe system) in the first column and a two-character screen reference inthe second column.

Suggestion: Call your screen reference similar to your screen sequencenumber Y## or Z##.

Save your entries.

Double-click Screen sequence control in the dialog structure and thenchoose New Entries. Enter the following:

ScnRef.Transact

ScnRef. User ScnRef.MatType

ScnRef.Industrysector

Ssq

01 Your screenreference, forexample, Y##or Z##

* * Y# or Z#

Save your screen sequence control.

5. Check your settings by displaying, for example, the material master recordT-RD2##.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Caution: Undo the changes from exercise part 4 with regard thefollowing exercises.

a) SAP Easy Access menu: Logistics→ Production -Process→ Master Data→ Material Master→ Material→ Display→ Display Current

Material: for example, T-RD2##

Note the sequence of the views in view selection.

Choose the Basic Data view. The screen module Environment appears.

Undoing the changes from exercise part 4:

Delete your screen sequence control in Customizing by choosing Edit→ Delete.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Set up screen sequence control for material masters



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Unit Summary

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:� Explain the structure of a material master record.� Create and maintain material types� Create and maintain material master records� Set up field selection for material masters� Set up screen sequence control for material masters



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit Summary PLM115



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Test Your Knowledge

1. Name the minimum scope of views that has to be maintained in the materialmaster for in-house production.

2. Name such functions that are controlled by the material type.

3. Which information is required for creating a material master record?

4. Which influencing factors are used to control the field selection for materialmaster records?

5. Name the influencing factors for the screen sequence control.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Answers

1. Name the minimum scope of views that has to be maintained in the materialmaster for in-house production.

Answer:

� Basic data� MRP� Work scheduling� Accounting� Costing� Plant and storage location stock

2. Name such functions that are controlled by the material type.

Answer:

� Field selection and screen sequence� Number assignment (check external number Y/N)� Costing control (with / without quantity structure)� Initial state of a batch� Internal / external purchase orders (permitted / not permitted)� User departments (allowed views for material maintenance)� Valuation: price control (standard price / moving average price)� Quantity/value update

3. Which information is required for creating a material master record?

Answer:

� Material number (ext./int. number assignment)� Material type� Industry sector� Views to be created� Organizational levels� Possibly, profiles



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


4. Which influencing factors are used to control the field selection for materialmaster records?

Answer:

� Transaction� Material type� Plant� Industry sector� Procurement indicator

5. Name the influencing factors for the screen sequence control.

Answer:

� Transaction� User� Material type� Industry sector



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit Summary PLM115



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit 3Aspects of the Classification System

Unit OverviewThis chapter introduces fundamental aspects of the classification system.


� Create and maintain classes and characteristics� Name the main class types used for process manufacturing and describe their

functions

Unit ContentsLesson: Classification System .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80Lesson: Classifying Objects for Process Manufacturing.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Exercise 6: Classifying Objects for Process Manufacturing .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit 3: Aspects of the Classification System PLM115

Lesson: Classification System

Lesson OverviewThis lesson introduces you to the task and the fundamental working of theclassification system.


� Create and maintain classes and characteristics

Business ExampleFind out about the task and basic functions of the classification system.

Purpose of the Classification System

� Classification

Grouping of objects in classes

� Characteristic value assignment:

Describing classified objects in more detail using class characteristics

⇒ Search for / assign

objects using classes and characteristics



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Lesson: Classification System

Classification Example

Figure 28: Classification Example

Characteristic Value Assignment: Example

Figure 29: Characteristic Value Assignment: Example



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Object Search: Example

Figure 30: Object Search: Example

Object Assignment: Batch Determination Example

Figure 31: Object Assignment: Batch Determination Example

You can use the batch determination function to assign batches required forproduction. The system looks for batches in stock according to user-defined selectioncriteria and assigns them to the order.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Lesson: Classification System

You can define the selection conditions for batch determination as characteristicvalues in classes of class type Batch. You can assign this class either directly to thematerial component or to a search strategy.

The characteristics of a batch are also defined by characteristic values of a classtype Batch class.

On the basis of the selection conditions and batch classification, the system selectssuitable batches in stock and assigns them to the order.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Create and maintain classes and characteristics



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Lesson: Classifying Objects for Process Manufacturing

Lesson: Classifying Objects for Process Manufacturing

Lesson OverviewThis lesson introduces you to the main class types for mapping process manufacturing.


� Name the main class types used for process manufacturing and describe theirfunctions

Business ExampleYour company wants to use the Batch Determination and Resource Selection andReconciliation functions.

These functions use the classification system and certain class types.

You create the required classes and characteristics with reference to the correspondingclass types.

Class Type

� A class type is the top-level unit of control for classes. Each class must beassigned to exactly one class type.

� The class type defines, for example:

� The objects that can be classified in a class� Whether objects of different object types can be classified in the same class

Sample Class Types

Sample Class TypesClass type Classifiable objects001 Material Materials023 Batch Materials, batches, BOM

items/reservations



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Class type Classifiable objects050 Reconciliation BOM items / reservations019 Work center class

Work centers (=resources)

Planning item (=operations) / orderoperations

( ... ) ( ... )

Classifying Objects for Process Manufacturing

Figure 32: Classifying Objects for Process Manufacturing



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Exercise 6: Classifying Objects for ProcessManufacturing

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Create and maintain material characteristic� Create and maintain classes

Business ExampleYour company wants to use the Batch Determination and Resource Selection functions.

These functions are based on the classification system.

You create the classes and characteristics needed with reference to the class types tobe used.

Task:Classification System

1. Display the characteristics M100 and M200.

Write down the description and formatting details for these characteristics.

Characteristic Description Data type Unit of measureM100M200

Which status do the characteristics have?

________________

Which type of value assignment has been defined for the characteristics?

________________

Is a value assignment for a classified object required?

________________

Are interval values allowed?

________________




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Are you allowed to enter negative values?

________________

To which class types is the usage of the characteristics restricted?

Tab page Restrictions

________________

________________

________________

Within which value range are you allowed to assign values to characteristics?

Tab page Values

Characteristic Allowed valuesM100M200

Are you allowed to assign values that have not been defined as allowed values?________________

Display the indicators for one of the characteristics on the Additional Data tab.

Use the Field Help (F1) to find out more about the functions of these indicators.

2. Display the class 023_14 of class type 023 Batch.

Which description does this class have?

_______________

Which status does this class have?

________________

Which characteristics are assigned to this class?

Tab page Characteristics

________________




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


________________

Hint: During this training course, we will use class 023-14 to classifyraw material batches.

This is a prerequisite for using the Batch Determination function.

3. Creating characteristics

In this exercise, you will create the characteristics M3## and M6## in theclassification system. You then assign these characteristics to the classREAC_##, which you first need to create.

a) Create characteristic M3##:

Description Surface coating

Data type Character format

No. of characters 1Value assignment Single value

Specify that a value must be assigned to the characteristic.

Restrict the possible characteristic values in the following way:

Characteristic value DescriptionG Glass-coatedP Polyethylene-coatedS Stainless steel

Restrict the usage of the characteristics to the class type 019 Work center class.

Save characteristic M3##.

b) Create characteristic M6##:

Description Revolutions per minuteData type Numeric formatNo. of characters 3




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Decimal places 0Unit of measure No entryValue assignment Single value

Specify that a value must not necessarily be assigned to the characteristic.

Interval values are allowed.

Enter a possible value range of 0 � 500.

Specify that the allowed values are displayed during characteristic valueassignment.

Restrict the usage of the characteristics to the class type 019Work center class.

Save the characteristic M6##.

4. Creating a class

Create the class REAC_## of the class type 019 Work center class.

Enter 'Reaction vessel' as the description and assign the characteristics M3##and M6##.

Save your class.

Hint: During the course, the class REAC_## will be used for theclassification of resources (reaction vessels).

This is a prerequisite for using the Resource Selection function.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Solution 6: Classifying Objects for ProcessManufacturingTask:Classification System

1. Display the characteristics M100 and M200.

Write down the description and formatting details for these characteristics.

Characteristic Description Data type Unit of measureM100M200

Which status do the characteristics have?

________________

Which type of value assignment has been defined for the characteristics?

________________

Is a value assignment for a classified object required?

________________

Are interval values allowed?

________________

Are you allowed to enter negative values?

________________



________________

________________

________________

Within which value range are you allowed to assign values to characteristics?

Tab page Values




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Characteristic Allowed valuesM100M200

Are you allowed to assign values that have not been defined as allowed values?________________

Display the indicators for one of the characteristics on the Additional Data tab.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Use the Field Help (F1) to find out more about the functions of these indicators.

a) SAP Easy Access menu → Cross-Application Components →Classification System→ Master Data→ Characteristics

Characteristic Description Data type Unit ofmeasure

M100 Concentration Numeric format %M200 Density Numeric format g/ccm

Which status do the characteristics have? Released

Which type of value assignment has been defined for the characteristics?Single value

Is a value assignment for a classified object required? No

Are interval values allowed? Yes

Are you allowed to enter negative values? No



001 = Material class

022 = Batch (at plant level)

023 = Batch (at client or material level)

Within which value range are you allowed to assign values tocharacteristics?

Tab page Values

Characteristic Allowed valuesM100 2.0 - 98.0 %M200 0.5000 - -2.0000 g/ccm

Are you allowed to assign values that have not been defined as allowedvalues?

No (the Additional Values indicator has not been set)

2. Display the class 023_14 of class type 023 Batch.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Which description does this class have?

_______________

Which status does this class have?

________________



________________

________________

Hint: During this training course, we will use class 023-14 to classifyraw material batches.

This is a prerequisite for using the Batch Determination function.

a) SAP Easy Access Menu → Cross-Application Components →Classification System→ Master Data→ Classes

Which description does this class have? Detergent production

Which status does this class have? Released



M100 concentration

M200 density

3. Creating characteristics

In this exercise, you will create the characteristics M3## and M6## in theclassification system. You then assign these characteristics to the classREAC_##, which you first need to create.

a) Create characteristic M3##:

Description Surface coatingData type Character formatNo. of characters 1Value assignment Single value




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Specify that a value must be assigned to the characteristic.

Restrict the possible characteristic values in the following way:

Characteristic value DescriptionG Glass-coatedP Polyethylene-coatedS Stainless steel


Save characteristic M3##.

b) Create characteristic M6##:

Description Revolutions per minuteData type Numeric formatNo. of characters 3Decimal places 0Unit of measure No entryValue assignment Single value

Specify that a value must not necessarily be assigned to the characteristic.

Interval values are allowed.

Enter a possible value range of 0 � 500.

Specify that the allowed values are displayed during characteristic valueassignment.


Save the characteristic M6##.

a) Creating characteristics

SAP Easy Access menu→ Cross-Application Components→ ClassificationSystem→ Master Data→ Characteristics

4. Creating a class

Create the class REAC_## of the class type 019 Work center class.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Enter 'Reaction vessel' as the description and assign the characteristics M3##and M6##.

Save your class.

Hint: During the course, the class REAC_## will be used for theclassification of resources (reaction vessels).

This is a prerequisite for using the Resource Selection function.

a) SAP Easy Access Menu → Cross-Application Components →Classification System→ Master Data→ Classes



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Name the main class types used for process manufacturing and describe their

functions



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit Summary PLM115

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:� Create and maintain classes and characteristics� Name the main class types used for process manufacturing and describe their

functions



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Test Your Knowledge

1. Describe the task of the class system.

2. Name the class types used in process manufacturing and the functions for theprocess order that are based on these.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Answers

1. Describe the task of the class system.

Answer:

� Classification:grouping of objects in classes� Characteristic value assignment:describing classified objects in more detail

using class characteristics� Search / assignment of objects using classes and characteristics

2. Name the class types used in process manufacturing and the functions for theprocess order that are based on these.

Answer:

� Class type 023 batch: batch determination in the process order� Class type 019 work center class: resource selection in the process order� Class type 050 material reconciliation: reconciliation for material

components after process order processing



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit 4Aspects of Batch Management

Unit OverviewThis chapter introduces fundamental aspects of batch management.


� Classify materials in class type Batch� Create batch master records and explain characteristic inheritance from material

to batch� Make basic settings for proportion unit calculation (active ingredient

management)� Name and explain the available batch levels.

Unit ContentsLesson: Batches and Batch Management.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102

Exercise 7: Batches and Batch Management ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109Lesson: Batch-Specific Material Units of Measure .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Exercise 8: Batch-Specific Material Units of Measure... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125Lesson: Batch Levels ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit 4: Aspects of Batch Management PLM115

Lesson: Batches and Batch Management

Lesson OverviewThis lesson provides an overview of batch management.


� Classify materials in class type Batch� Create batch master records and explain characteristic inheritance from material

to batch

Business ExampleProcess orders usually use the integration with batch management for their productsand material components.

Materials that you want to include in batch management must be defined as beingsubject to batch management requirement.

To describe the batch properties in more detail, you then classify the relevant materialsin a separate class of class type Batch.

Batch and Batch Master Record: Definition

BatchSubset of the total quantity of a material held in stock. This subset ismanaged separately from other subsets of the same material.Quantity of a material produced during a given production run. A batchrepresents a non-reproducible, homogeneous unit with unique specifications.A production lot can consists of one or more batches.Batches are always uniquely assigned to a material.

Batch master recordData record containing the information required for managing a batch.

A batch master record is identified by an alphanumeric batch number. You can choosethe level at which you want the batch number to be unique in accordance with thestructure of your plant and company and your operational requirements.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Lesson: Batches and Batch Management

This material number is unique at the client level. The uniqueness of the batch numbercan be defined at the following levels:

� In combination with a plant and material� In combination with a material number� At client level

Batch Management: Scope of Functions

� Batch management:

� Integrated into all applications of the ECC system� Supports the management and processing of batches in all business

processes of an enterprise� Scope of functions:

� Batch number assignment� Batch specification (using the classification system)� Batch determination� Active ingredient management (batch-specific units of measure)� Batch derivation� Batch record� Batch where-used list� Batch status management� Batch Information Cockpit

Batch management is a function for all industry areas.

It is of particular importance in the following industry sectors:

� Chemical industry� Pharmaceuticals� Food industry� Cosmetics� Health and hygiene� Retail



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Batch Management in Supply Chain Mgmt.

Figure 33: Batch Management in Supply Chain Mgmt.

Some industry sectors, in particular in process industries, need to work withhomogenous subsets of a material or product, this means, batches along their entiresupply chain.

Batch management is integrated with all applications of the ECC system andsupports the management and processing of batches in all business processes ofan enterprise.

In particular, batch management is used in Supply Chain Management. A batch can befollowed through the whole supply chain, ranging from the entry of the raw materialsto the production of the finished product, and all the way to sales and delivery tothe customer.

You can assign a batch to a material at various points in the supply chain by creatinga batch master record. For example, if the subset of a material that is subject tobatch management requirement leaves a production process (process order) withcertain specifications, it is posted to stock with a batch number and can then beclearly identified.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


If you need a batch with certain specifications in the supply chain, you can findsuitable batches from the system in stock using the batch determination function. Inproduction, batch determination is carried out in a process order to find and withdrawsuitable material components for the material to be produced.

Material and Batch

Figure 34: Material and Batch

In the ECC system, batch master records depend on the corresponding material masterrecord. Batches are created for a material.

The Batch object contains the key fields Material, Batch, and Plant. However, thePlant field is only relevant if the plant level is used as batch level.

In general, the data of a material master record is valid for all batches assigned to it.In contrast, a batch master record contains data that uniquely identifies a batch andcharacterizes it as a non-reproducible unit.

You can further describe batch properties by classifying them in a class of class type023 Batch.

If a material is to be produced in batches and is subject to inventory management, youmust set the Batch management indicator in the material master views Purchasing,Work Scheduling, or Warehouse Management.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


You either create a batch master record manually during master data maintenance orthe system creates it automatically in the background (for example, when the firstgoods movement is posted).

Classification of Material and Batch: CharacteristicInheritance

Figure 35: Classification of Material and Batch: Characteristic Inheritance

When defining the specifications for batch master records, the higher-level materialmaster records are assigned to classes belonging to class type Batch. In these classes,all material and batch properties are stored as characteristics.

Class type batch specifies a hierarchical relationship between the object types materialand batch:

When you create a batch for a material, the batch is automatically assigned to thesame class of class type batch used to classify the material. This ensures that thesame characteristics are used for the material and the batch. In the ECC system,this is called characteristic inheritance.

You can define value ranges or fixed values for a characteristic of a class. Thesespecify a maximum value range that applies to all objects assigned to this class, inthis case materials and batches.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


In the material master record, you can further restrict the values preset by thecharacteristics. These restrictions are inherited by the batch of the material. You canthen only assign values to the characteristics of the batch that lie within the rangespecified for the material.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Exercise 7: Batches and Batch Management

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Classify materials in class type Batch� Create batch master records and explain characteristic inheritance from material

to batch

Business ExampleProcess orders usually use the integration with batch management for their productsand material components.

Materials that you want to include in batch management must be defined as beingsubject to batch management requirement.

To describe the batch properties in more detail, you then classify the relevant materialsin a separate class of class type Batch.

Task 1:Batch management requirement

1. Check whether the Batch management indicator is set for both the finishedproduct T-FD1## and its raw material T-RD1##.

Select view(s): General plant data/storage 1Organizational levels: Plant 1100

Task 2:Classification of materials in the class type 'Batch'

1. Classify your finished product T-FD1## in class 023_15 'Detergent' of classtype 023 'Batch'.

Select view(s): ClassificationClass type: 023 'Batch'

Assign the following characteristic value:




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Density: 1.10 - 1.20 g g/ccm

Save your entry.

2. Classify your raw material T-RD1## (Sulfuric acid) in the class 023_14Detergent production of the class type 023 Batch.

Assign the following characteristic values:

Concentration 40 � 60 %Density 1.30 - 1.50 g/ccm

Save your entries.

Task 3:Creating batches / characteristic inheritance

1. Create the batch master record CH_1 for material T-RD1##.

To which class is the batch assigned?

________________

Classification tab

Within which value range can you assign values to the characteristics?

Why?

______________________________

______________________________


Concentration 50 %Density 1.39 g/ccm

Save the batch master record.

2. Post a goods receipt of 500,000 L of batch CH_1 of material T-RD1## in storagelocation 0002 of plant 1100.

Use movement type 501.

Save the goods receipt and then check the stock for material T-RD1##.Continued on next page



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


3. Post another goods receipt (movement type 501) for batch CH_2 of materialT-RD1## in storage location 0002 of plant 1100.

The system creates the batch master record in the background. Before postingthe goods receipt, the system displays the characteristics of the new batch CH_2for value assignment.



Post your goods receipt.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Solution 7: Batches and Batch ManagementTask 1:Batch management requirement

1. Check whether the Batch management indicator is set for both the finishedproduct T-FD1## and its raw material T-RD1##.

Select view(s): General plant data/storage 1Organizational levels: Plant 1100

a) (�)→ Material→ Display→ Display Current

Task 2:Classification of materials in the class type 'Batch'

1. Classify your finished product T-FD1## in class 023_15 'Detergent' of classtype 023 'Batch'.

Select view(s): ClassificationClass type: 023 'Batch'

Assign the following characteristic value:

Density: 1.10 - 1.20 g g/ccm

Save your entry.

a) (...) → Material→ Change→ Immediately

Material: T-FD1##Select view(s): ClassificationClass type: 023 'Batch'Class: 023_15

Assign the characteristic values.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


2. Classify your raw material T-RD1## (Sulfuric acid) in the class 023_14Detergent production of the class type 023 Batch.



Save your entries.

a) (...) → Material→ Change→ Immediately

Material: T-RD1##Select view(s): ClassificationClass type: 023 'Batch'Class: 023_14

Assign the characteristic values.

Task 3:Creating batches / characteristic inheritance

1. Create the batch master record CH_1 for material T-RD1##.

To which class is the batch assigned?

________________

Classification tab


Why?

______________________________

______________________________






I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Save the batch master record.

a) (�)→ Material Master→ Batch→ Create

Material: T-RD1##Batch: CH_1

Classification tab

To which class is the batch assigned? 023_14


Why?

Use the input help (F4) on the Values field for the characteristics.

40 � 60 %

1.3 - 1.5 g/ccm

The value ranges of the characteristics are predefined by the classificationof the material master.

2. Post a goods receipt of 500,000 L of batch CH_1 of material T-RD1## in storagelocation 0002 of plant 1100.

Use movement type 501.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Save the goods receipt and then check the stock for material T-RD1##.

a) Goods receipt for batch created

Goods receipt:

SAP Easy Access Menu→ Logistics→ Materials Management→Inventory Management→ Goods Movement→ Goods Receipt→ Other.

Movement type: 501Plant: 1100Storage location: 0002Choose Enter.Material: T-RD1##Quantity: 500,000 lBatch: CH_1

Post goods receipt (save)

Check stock:

SAP Easy Access Menu→ Logistics→ Production -Process→ MasterData→ Material Master→ Other→ Stock Overview

3. Post another goods receipt (movement type 501) for batch CH_2 of materialT-RD1## in storage location 0002 of plant 1100.

The system creates the batch master record in the background. Before postingthe goods receipt, the system displays the characteristics of the new batch CH_2for value assignment.






I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Post your goods receipt.

a) Goods receipt for batch not created

Goods receipt:

SAP Easy Access Menu→ Logistics→ Materials Management→Inventory Management→ Goods Movement→ Goods Receipt→ Other.

Movement type: 501Plant: 1100Storage location: 0002Choose Enter.Material: T-RD1##Quantity: 500,000 lBatch: CH_2

Post goods receipt (save)

Assign characteristic values to batch.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Classify materials in class type Batch� Create batch master records and explain characteristic inheritance from material

to batch



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson: Batch-Specific Material Units of Measure

Lesson OverviewThis lesson introduces you to the maintenance of batch-specific units of measure.


� Make basic settings for proportion unit calculation (active ingredientmanagement)

Business ExampleIn your company, you use proportion unit calculation (active ingredient management)and make the basic settings for that.

Batch-Specific Material Unit of Measure� Batch-specific material unit

An alternative unit of measure of a material, for which you can define theconversion ratio into the base unit of measure on a batch-specific basis.

Batch-specific material units of measure are:

� Proportion unit� Product unit of measure

Proportion units and product units of measure for materials that are subject tobatch management requirement can be used in all processes in the supply chain.

You use batch-specific units of measure when the ratio for conversion from the unit ofmeasure into the base unit of measure can differ from batch to batch.

Proportion unit: Unit of measure in which proportion quantities of a material can beentered. The total or physical quantity can consist of several proportions.

Product unit of measure: Unit of measure that describes the total quantity of amaterial. Used as an alternative to the base unit of measure.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Lesson: Batch-Specific Material Units of Measure

While the conversion ratio for non-batch specific alternative units of measure is notspecified in the base unit of measure in the material, for proportion units and productunits of measure, you define

� The planned conversion ratio in the material� The actual conversion ration in the batch

As long as the batch is not known, the system uses the planned conversion ratio fromthe material when converting to the base quantity. As soon as the batch is known, thesystem uses the actual conversion ratio from the batch.

Proportion Unit Calculation (Active Ingredient Quantities)

Figure 36: Proportion Unit Calculation (Active Ingredient Quantities)



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Example: Using Proportion Quantities in the MasterRecipe

Figure 37: Example: Using Proportion Quantities in the Master Recipe



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Batch-Specific Material Units of Measure: Customizing

Figure 38: Batch-Specific Material Units of Measure: Customizing



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Batch-Specific Material Units of Measure: Master DataMaintenance

Figure 39: Batch-Specific Material Units of Measure: Master Data Maintenance



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Material Master Classification

Figure 40: Material Master Classification

Active ingredient characteristics are assigned the special view 'S' within the batchclass.

Characteristics with this view are recognized when you maintain the material master.The information for conversion between active ingredient and physical quantity istransferred to the material master.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Maintaining Units of Measure in the Material Master

Figure 41: Maintaining Units of Measure in the Material Master

When you have maintained the Classification view, the system knows possible activeingredient characteristics and you can select them in the Proportion/product unit ofmeasure view and assign them to a suitable proportion unit if required.

You must then complete the information in the Proportion/Product Unit of Measureview: The system expects a planned value for the active ingredient proportion.

The planned value specifies the expected mixing ratio between active ingredient andphysical quantity in the characteristic unit of measurement.

� If the actual proportion of active ingredient in a batch is not known for aparticular business transaction, the system uses the planned value from thematerial master.

� The planned value for the conversion between active ingredient and physicalquantity is transferred to the units of measure table automatically.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Exercise 8: Batch-Specific Material Units ofMeasure

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Make basic settings for proportion unit calculation (active ingredient

management)

Business ExampleIn addition, you make the basic settings for proportion quantity calculation (activeingredient management) for some of your materials.

Task:Settings for active ingredient management

Settings for active ingredient managementMaterial Fruit premix T-RJ1## contains theproportion units (active ingredients) Fruit Content and Acid Content.

As an alternative to the base unit of measure, you also want to use batch-specificmaterial units of measure in your different applications.

1. Check whether suitable units of measure have been defined. What are thedescriptions for the following units of measure?

LF = _________________________________

LA = _________________________________

2. Make sure that the use of batch-specific units of measure is activated!

3. To which unit of measure are the batch-specific units of measurement LF andLA referenced?

4. Take a look at the definition of the characteristic unit of measure % forproportion calculation.

Note that in the case of percentage proportion calculation the units of measureare defined independent of the batch-specific units of measure and base unitsof measure.

Afterwards, take a look at, for example, the definition of the characteristic unitof measure LIL.What are the batch-specific units of measure and the baseunits of measure from which it is calculated?




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


LIL = __________________________________________

5. Display the material master record of the material Fruit Premix T-RJ1##. Whichdata is maintained in the classification view?

Characteristic value: Characteristic value:Material: Class: Fruit content Acid contentT-RJ1##

6. Check whether the application view S is maintained in the basic data and inthe characteristics in the classes found under 5-4-5. Display the class from thematerial master of the raw material T-RJ1##.

7. What are the characteristic names that belong to the characteristicdescriptions fruit content and acid content?

Fruit content = ____________________________

Acid content = ____________________________

8. Check whether the characteristics mentioned in 7-4-7 have the followingsettings:

The status is released.

The data type is numeric.

The value assignment is a single value and no negative values are allowed.

Which unit of measure is maintained for these two characteristics?

____________________

9. Navigate to the Additional Data in the material master of material T-RJ1##.

Navigate to the Proportion/Product Unit view.

With reference to which batch characteristic was a conversion of the base unit ofmeasure to the proportion unit defined? ____________________

To which proportion unit is the base unit of measure converted?___________________

Which planned value is used for conversion as long as no concrete batch isknown? ____________________

Finally, navigate to the Units of Measure view in the additional data.

10. a) In change mode, navigate to the Additional Data of your material T-RJ1##.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y



Use the additional characteristic M900 acid content to also define the use ofthe proportion unit LA.

The planned value is to be 3 %.

Save your settings.

b) Post the goods receipts for several batches for material T-RJ1## to warehouse0002 of plant 1100.

Carry out the different analyses regarding the batch characteristics Fruit Contentand Acid Content.

c) Display the batch stocks in the stock overview for the units of measure L,LF and LA.

Compare stock quantities with the corresponding characteristic values.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Solution 8: Batch-Specific Material Units ofMeasureTask:Settings for active ingredient management

Settings for active ingredient managementMaterial Fruit premix T-RJ1## contains theproportion units (active ingredients) Fruit Content and Acid Content.

As an alternative to the base unit of measure, you also want to use batch-specificmaterial units of measure in your different applications.

1. Check whether suitable units of measure have been defined. What are thedescriptions for the following units of measure?

LF = _________________________________

LA = _________________________________

a) Tools→ Customizing→ IMG→ Execute Project / SAP Reference IMG /

SAP Customizing Implementation Guide→ General Settings→ SAPNetweaver→ Check Units of Measure/

Units of Measure (without dimensions)

LF = L fruit

LA = L Acid

2. Make sure that the use of batch-specific units of measure is activated!

a) (�)→ SAP Customizing Implementation Guide→ Logistics - General→ Batch Management→ Batch-Specific Material Units of Measure→Activate Batch-Specific Units of Measure

3. To which unit of measure are the batch-specific units of measurement LF andLA referenced?

a) (�)→ SAP Customizing Implementation Guide→ Logistics - General→Batch Management→ Batch-Specific Material Units of Measure→ EditBatch-Specific Units of Measure

Both batch-specific units of measure have the Liter as their reference unitof measure.

4. Take a look at the definition of the characteristic unit of measure % forproportion calculation.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Note that in the case of percentage proportion calculation the units of measureare defined independent of the batch-specific units of measure and base unitsof measure.

Afterwards, take a look at, for example, the definition of the characteristic unitof measure LIL.What are the batch-specific units of measure and the baseunits of measure from which it is calculated?

LIL = __________________________________________

a) (�)→ SAP Customizing Implementation Guide→ Logistics - General→ Batch Management→ Batch-Specific Material Units of Measure→Calculate Proportional Factors→ Define Percentage Calculation

(�) SAP Customizing Implementation Guide→ Logistics - General→ Batch Management→ Batch-Specific Material Units of Measure→Calculate Proportional Factors→ Define Calculation of ProportionQuantity from Base Quantity

LIL = LI1 Liter Active ingredient 1/ L Liter

5. Display the material master record of the material Fruit Premix T-RJ1##. Whichdata is maintained in the classification view?

Characteristic value: Characteristic value:Material: Class: Fruit content Acid contentT-RJ1##


Classification view

Characteristic value: Characteristic value:Material: Class: Fruit content Acid contentT-RJ1## 023_20 80 � 100 % 3 � 5 %




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


6. Check whether the application view S is maintained in the basic data and inthe characteristics in the classes found under 5-4-5. Display the class from thematerial master of the raw material T-RJ1##.

a) Material master T-RJ1##

Classification view

Position the cursor on the class entry

Environment→ Display Master Data

Basic data and Characteristics tab pages

Both the class and the characteristics are maintained for application view S.

7. What are the characteristic names that belong to the characteristicdescriptions fruit content and acid content?

Fruit content = ____________________________

Acid content = ____________________________

a) In the class master record:

Characteristics tab page

Fruit content = M800

Acid content = M900

8. Check whether the characteristics mentioned in 7-4-7 have the followingsettings:

The status is released.

The data type is numeric.

The value assignment is a single value and no negative values are allowed.

Which unit of measure is maintained for these two characteristics?

____________________

a) In the class master record:

Characteristics tab page

Double-click the characteristic.

Characteristics M800 and M900 are both released, numeric, and have asingle value. Negative values are not allowed. For both characteristics,the unit of measure % (percent) is maintained.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


9. Navigate to the Additional Data in the material master of material T-RJ1##.


With reference to which batch characteristic was a conversion of the base unit ofmeasure to the proportion unit defined? ____________________

To which proportion unit is the base unit of measure converted?___________________

Which planned value is used for conversion as long as no concrete batch isknown? ____________________

Finally, navigate to the Units of Measure view in the additional data.

a) With reference to which batch characteristic was a conversion of the baseunit of measure to the proportion unit defined?

M800 Fruit Content

To which proportion unit is the base unit of measure converted?

LF Liter Fruit

Which planned value is used for conversion as long as no concrete batchis known?

85 %

10. a) In change mode, navigate to the Additional Data of your material T-RJ1##.


Use the additional characteristic M900 acid content to also define the use ofthe proportion unit LA.

The planned value is to be 3 %.

Save your settings.

b) Post the goods receipts for several batches for material T-RJ1## to warehouse0002 of plant 1100.

Carry out the different analyses regarding the batch characteristics Fruit Contentand Acid Content.

c) Display the batch stocks in the stock overview for the units of measure L,LF and LA.

Compare stock quantities with the corresponding characteristic values.

a) Task no 10 to a-c is an exercise description; use the usual approach



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Make basic settings for proportion unit calculation (active ingredient

management)



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Lesson: Batch Levels

Lesson: Batch Levels

Lesson OverviewThis lesson introduces you to the batch levels that are available.


� Name and explain the available batch levels.

Business ExampleIn Customizing, you can choose the organizational validity area of the batches. Threebatch levels are available.

You must choose the level at which level you want the batch number to be uniquein accordance with the structure of your plant and company and your operationalrequirements.

Levels of Uniqueness of a Batch

Figure 42: Levels of Uniqueness of a Batch

A material master record is identified by an alphanumeric material number. Thismaterial number is unique at the client level.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


A batch master record is identified by an alphanumeric batch number. You can choosethe level at which you want the batch number to be unique in accordance with thestructure of your plant and company and your operational requirements.

Changing Batch Levels

Figure 43: Changing Batch Levels

You can select the validity of the batch in Customizing. Three batch levels areavailable. The default setting in the standard system is the plant level.

You can change to a higher level at any time. However, if you want to change to alower level, the system only lets you change from the material level to the client level.You cannot change to the plant level. This is due to the organization of the batch data,which must be converted each time you change the batch level.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Converting Batch Numbers

Figure 44: Converting Batch Numbers

If the batch number was unique at the plant level up to now, and you want to changethe validity so that it is unique only at the material level, you must convert the batchnumbers when you make this change.

Up to now, you could issue the same batch number for one material number ineach plant. The batches did not need to be identical, since they were completelyindependent of each other. In this example, we assume that the batch specificationsare completely different.

When converting existing batch data, the system checks whether identical batchnumbers exist. If all batch numbers are unique at the new level (that is, the materiallevel), the batch number can be converted directly. If they are not unique, the systemwrites a log containing all batch numbers that cannot be converted. You have todecide which batch numbers remain valid and which have to be posted to new batchestogether with their stock. If you want the system to delete batches, you must set thedeletion flag and start a batch reorganization run.

You can use the conversion tool to display the current state of conversion. Thesystem repeats the checks again and again to find out if the existing batch numbersare unique at the new level. Use the test mode. If the numbers are unique, you cancarry out conversion.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


At the new batch level, the batch number is unique for each material and is no longeradditionally distinguished by the plant.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Name and explain the available batch levels.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit Summary PLM115

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:� Classify materials in class type Batch� Create batch master records and explain characteristic inheritance from material

to batch� Make basic settings for proportion unit calculation (active ingredient

management)� Name and explain the available batch levels.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Test Your Knowledge

1. Name some items of the scope of functions of batch management

2. When do you use batch-specific material units of measure?

3. At which organizational levels can you define the uniqueness of the batchnumber?



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Answers

1. Name some items of the scope of functions of batch management

Answer:

� Batch number assignment� Batch specification (using the classification system)� Batch determination� Active ingredient management (batch-specific units of measure)� Batch derivation� Batch record� Batch where-used list� Batch status management� Batch Information Cockpit

2. When do you use batch-specific material units of measure?

Answer: You use batch-specific material units of measure when the ratio forconversion from the unit of measure into the base unit of measure can differfrom batch to batch.

3. At which organizational levels can you define the uniqueness of the batchnumber?

Answer:

� Client level� Material level� Plant level



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit 5Resources

Unit OverviewThis chapter introduces you to resource master records.


� Explain the structure of a resource master record.� Maintain available capacities� Create formulas and assign them in resource master records.� Create resources� Make the basic Customizing settings for resources� Create resource networks� Classify resources for system-aided resource selection� Carry out reporting for resources

Unit ContentsLesson: Resources: Overview .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142

Exercise 9: Resources: Overview.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147Lesson: Capacities ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153Lesson: Formulas.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157Lesson: Creating Resources and Further Maintenance Activities.. . . . . . . . . . .162

Exercise 10: Creating Resources and Further Maintenance Activities..169



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit 5: Resources PLM115

Lesson: Resources: Overview

Lesson OverviewThis lesson provides an overview of resource master records.


� Explain the structure of a resource master record.

Business ExampleYou have to map the means of production in your company in the form of resourcemaster records.

First, get an overview of the structure of resource master records.

Resources

Figure 45: Resources



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Lesson: Resources: Overview

Resources are the main planning instruments of production planning and control. Thedata you maintain for a resource is, for example, used for:

� Scheduling process orders� Capacity requirements planning� Product and order costing

Resources are grouped in resource categories on the basis of their usage and function.You can define your own resource categories in Customizing.

Resources in Recipes or Process Orders

Figure 46: Resources in Recipes or Process Orders

Operations describe the different steps required during the production process. For amore detailed description of these steps, phases are assigned to the operations.

Exactly one resource is assigned to an operation. This assignment of the resourceis also valid for all phases that belong to the operation.

Usually a master recipe is used to create a process order. The operation and phasestructure together with its relationships and assigned resources as well as materialcomponents and process instructions are copied to the process order.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Resource Data I

Figure 47: Resource Data I

You can find resource-related data on several screens. The graphic shows some of themost important resource data.

On the Basic Data screen, you define a person or group of persons responsible forthe maintenance of the master data of this resource. By defining the task list usage,you also specify the task list types (such as master recipe, equipment task list, orinspection plans) in which the resource can be used and whether the resource canbe used in orders.

By entering a standard value key, you assign possible standard values to a resourcefor the phases in process orders to be executed at this resource. A standard value is aplanned value used to carry out a phase, such as the execution time. Standard valuesare used in costing, scheduling, and capacity requirements planning to calculate costs,execution times, and capacity requirements.

You can enter default values for the phase to be executed at a resource. When youmaintain the phases and operations in the master recipe or process order, the systemcopies or references this information. You can, for instance, propose a control key. Acontrol key specifies how a phase or an operation is to be processed from a businesspoint of view.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Resource Data II

Figure 48: Resource Data II

Available capacities of resources are the basis for scheduling process orders. Theyare also required for capacity requirements planning and shop floor control.

In order to calculate the execution time of an operation during process orderscheduling, the available capacity of exactly one of several possible resourcecapacities is defined as the basis for scheduling.

By assigning a cost center to a resource, you link the resource to cost accountingand can now carry out product and order costing. You can define the specific output ofa resource by assigning activity types, which are defined for the cost center.

To calculate costs, execution times and capacity requirements of phases carried out ata resource, enter a formula key that refers to a suitable formula on the correspondingscreens of the resource.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Exercise 9: Resources: Overview

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Explain the structure of a resource master record.

Business ExampleYou are to get an overview of the data of a resource master record.

Task:Resource data overview

To get a general overview of the screens and fields of a resource, look through thosefor resource T-IC1## for plant 1100. Write down the corresponding entries.

Use F1 and F4 help to find out more about the meaning, functions, and entry optionsfor individual data fields.

1. Resource data overview

2. Basic data tab

DescriptionResource categoryPerson responsibleTask list usageStandard value keyAssigned default value

3. Defaults tab

Control keyUnit of measure of standard values

4. 'Capacities' tab




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Capacity categoryInternal processing requirementsformula

(Assigned formula for capacity requirements determination)

5. 'Scheduling' tab

Capacity category

Formula key for in-houseprocessing duration

(Assigned formula for calculating the phase duration)

6. Costing tab

ValidityControlling areaCost centerActivity typeFormula key

(Assigned formula for activity calculation regarding the default value)

From the resource menu, go to the Application Help. Familiarize yourself withthe information available on resources in the documentation.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Solution 9: Resources: OverviewTask:Resource data overview

To get a general overview of the screens and fields of a resource, look through thosefor resource T-IC1## for plant 1100. Write down the corresponding entries.

Use F1 and F4 help to find out more about the meaning, functions, and entry optionsfor individual data fields.

1. Resource data overview

a) (�)→ Resources→ Resource→ Display

2. Basic data tab

DescriptionResource categoryPerson responsibleTask list usageStandard value keyAssigned default value

a)

Description Mixing tankResource category 0008Person responsible I##Task list usage PI2Standard value key SAP8Assigned default value Duration, fixed

3. Defaults tab




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Control keyUnit of measure of standard values

a)

Control key PI01Unit of measure of standardvalues

MIN

4. 'Capacities' tab

Capacity categoryInternal processing requirementsformula

(Assigned formula for capacity requirements determination)

a)

Capacity category 008Internal processing requirementsformula

SAPL61

5. 'Scheduling' tab

Capacity category

Formula key for in-houseprocessing duration




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


(Assigned formula for calculating the phase duration)

a)

Capacity category 008Formula key for in-houseprocessing duration

SAPL61

6. Costing tab

ValidityControlling areaCost centerActivity typeFormula key

(Assigned formula for activity calculation regarding the default value)

From the resource menu, go to the Application Help. Familiarize yourself withthe information available on resources in the documentation.

a)

Validity 01.01.1998 � 31.12.9999Controlling area 1000Cost center 4271Activity type 1420Formula key SAPL61



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Explain the structure of a resource master record.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Lesson: Capacities

Lesson: Capacities

Lesson OverviewThis lesson introduces you to the maintenance of capacity data.


� Maintain available capacities

Business ExampleTo map the time-based availability of resources, you have to maintain availablecapacities.

Capacities and Capacity Categories

Figure 49: Capacities and Capacity Categories

Together with the available capacity and capacity loads collected for them, capacitiesare the central planning unit for capacity requirements planning.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


You can assign any number of capacities of different capacity categories to oneresource. A capacity category is a description that classifies capacities and can bedefined by the user in Customizing. Capacity categories are, for example, machinecapacities, labor capacities, and energy.

Maintaining Available Capacities

Figure 50: Maintaining Available Capacities

You can maintain variable availability in time for each capacity. The availablecapacity is the ability of a capacity to perform a specific task in a certain periodof time.

You create the available capacity that is to apply to only one specific resource as aresource capacity in the resource itself.

Capacities that are used by several capacities, such as a common steam reservoir orthe clean-out team, are created as pooled capacities and assigned to the resources.

When creating an available capacity, you can copy or reference capacities of differentorigins (for central maintenance of available capacities).

In Customizing, you can create default available capacities per plant and capacitycategory whose data is then set as default values when the corresponding capacityis created.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Lesson: Capacities

The available capacity is determined using work start and finish times, break times,rate of capacity utilization, and the number of individual capacities.

Different available capacities of a capacity category are identified using the versionnumber. The version of the available capacity that appears in the screen header as theactive version is used during capacity requirements planning and scheduling.

Maintaining Avail. Capacity Using Shift Sequences

Figure 51: Maintaining Avail. Capacity Using Shift Sequences

You can use shift sequences to reduce the time and effort needed to maintain anavailable capacity.

In a shift definition, you define the work start and finish times as well as duration ofbreaks, which are valid for several resources.

In a shift sequence, you maintain the sequence of certain shift definitions for severalresources.

You define shift sequences in Customizing.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Maintain available capacities



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Lesson: Formulas

Lesson: Formulas

Lesson OverviewThis lesson introduces you to there maintenance and the use of formulas for resources.


� Create formulas and assign them in resource master records.

Business ExampleYou have to assign formulas to your resources to control time scheduling, capacityrequirements planning and to determine costs in process orders.

Formulas in the Resource

Figure 52: Formulas in the Resource

To calculate costs, execution times and capacity requirements of phases carriedout at a resource, enter a formula key that refers to a suitable formula on thecorresponding screens of the resource.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Formula Parameters and Formula

Figure 53: Formula Parameters and Formula

Formulas and formula parameters are defined in Customizing.

Formula parameters that you can use include standard values, constants defined in theresource (for example, resource output) as well as general operation values in masterrecipes or process orders (for example, operation quantity).



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Duration and Capacity Requirement of a Phase

Figure 54: Duration and Capacity Requirement of a Phase

On the basis of the standard values and other formula parameters (see graphic),formulas are used to calculate the duration and capacity requirements (per capacitycategory) of a phase.

To calculate the duration, you must specify a capacity category as a basis forscheduling and define a formula in the resource.

When calculating the phase dates, the available capacity of the scheduling basisincluding breaks is taken into account.

Scheduling and determination of capacity requirements takes place at phase level. Theoperation dates and capacity requirements of operations are derived from the phase.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Production Costs per Phase

Figure 55: Production Costs per Phase

The costs incurred due to the use of a resource in a phase must be calculated inproduction and order costing. For this, you must maintain costing data in the resource.

The link to cost accounting is created by assigning a cost center to a resource.

For a specified validity period, you can assign a resource to one cost center only.

To calculate the costs, activity types specified in the cost centers are assigned to theresource for each default value. Each activity type is valued with specific price.

The output of a resource is calculated for each default value and activity type with thehelp of formulas.

Finally, the costs are calculated using the output of a resource and the correspondingprices.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Create formulas and assign them in resource master records.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson: Creating Resources and Further MaintenanceActivities

Lesson OverviewIn this lesson you will learn how resource master records are created and managed.Furthermore, you will learn about important Customizing settings for resourcemanagement


� Create resources� Make the basic Customizing settings for resources� Create resource networks� Classify resources for system-aided resource selection� Carry out reporting for resources

Business ExampleYou use resource master records to map your company's means of production ontothe SAP ECC System.

First, you will make the necessary basic Customizing settings.

You will then maintain the resource data, which means that you maintain, for example,available capacities and assign formulas to be able to carry out scheduling andcapacity planning, and determine costs for the process order.

Further activities include creating resource networks and classifying resources for thepurpose of system-aided resource selection.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Lesson: Creating Resources and Further Maintenance Activities

Creating a resource

Figure 56: Creating a resource

You can create a resource in PP-PI in the following ways:

� Manually� Using a default resource that is defined in Customizing per plant and resource

category. Its data is used as default values when a corresponding resource iscreated.

� By copying a resource that already exists



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Customizing: Basic Settings

Figure 57: Customizing: Basic Settings

Functions of the Resource Category

Figure 58: Functions of the Resource Category



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Resources are grouped in resource categories on the basis of their usage and function.

You can define your own resource categories in Customizing.

Resource categories have the following functions:

� Each resource category is assigned one or more task list types in Customizing. Atask list application groups one or more task list types. This assignment specifiesthe task list types for which a resource of a certain category can be used. Task listtypes are, for instance, master recipes, maintenance task lists, inspection plans.In PP-PI, the task list type "master recipes" is used.

� In Customizing, you can maintain a default resource for each resource categoryand plant. When you create a resource, the data maintained for the defaultresource is transferred to this resource as default values.

� In Customizing, you can define the screen sequence and field selection forresource maintenance for each resource category.

Field Selection

Figure 59: Field Selection



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


In Customizing for Resources, you can use field selection to influence the attributes ofindividual fields shown on the resource maintenance screens. You can specify howspecific data fields are displayed. You have the following options for data fields:

� Input field� Required input field� Display field� The field is hidden.� The field is highlighted.

You can specify the field display for all resource categories for each screen group andthen change it later for certain resource categories.

Resource Network

Figure 60: Resource Network

You can often use processing units in a specified sequence only. Predecessor and

To map this onto the system, you can create predecessor/successor relationshipsbetween resources in the form of resource networks.

If several similar resources are available in a network, it makes sense to decide on theresource to be used at the time of production and not before. To do this, you can usethe task list usage to define a resource that is to be used for planning purposes only.This resource represents several equivalent resources.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


In Customizing, you can set theUntil release indicator for a task list usage. If a processorder is assigned a resource whose usage is restricted in this way, the order cannot bereleased. Before releasing the order, you must replace the planning resource with asuitable individual resource. You can use the function of resource selection to do so.

Classification of Resources

Figure 61: Classification of Resources

You can add specific resource attributes to the resource data by classifying theresource with classes of class type 019 Work center class. The resource attributes arestored as characteristics of a class and are assigned specific values in the resources.

Apart from resources, you can also classify operations of master recipes (or processorders) in classes of class type 019. This allows you to store specifications for aresource in an operation.

The characteristic values of classified operations represent the selection criteria forsystem-aided resource selection in the process order. This enables the selection of asuitable resource just before production begins. The resource network can be takeninto account for resource selection.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Reporting Functions for Resources

Figure 62: Reporting Functions for Resources



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Exercise 10: Creating Resources andFurther Maintenance Activities

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Create and maintain resources� Maintain available capacities� Make the basic Customizing settings for resources� Create resource networks� Classify resources for system-aided resource selection� Carry out reporting for resources

Business ExampleYou use resource master records to map your company's means of production ontothe SAP ECC System.

First, you will make the necessary basic Customizing settings.

You will then maintain the resource data, which means that you maintain, for example,available capacities and assign formulas to be able to carry out scheduling andcapacity planning, and determine costs in the process order.

Further activities include creating resource networks and classifying resources for thepurpose of system-aided resource selection.

Task 1:Basic Customizing settings for resources

In this exercise, you will become familiar with the most important Customizingsettings for resources. Documentation is available for the individual Customizingactivities, which you can display if you need help when making Customizing settings.Furthermore, you can use the F1 and F4 help for data maintenance.

1. Basic Customizing settings for resources

2. Defining a resource category

Define the resource category RE## "Processing unit group". ##'.

Reference to the field selection and the screen sequence of the existing resourcecategory 0008.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Specify that change documents are to be written for the resources of the categoryRE##.

Assign the task list usage for recipes to the resource category RE##.

3. Defining a person responsible for a resource

Define the person responsible R## "Person responsible for resource group##" forplant 1100.

4. Defining a task list usage

Define the task list usages O## "Recipe & Order group##" and C## "Recipeuntil release, group##".

Assign the task list type �Master recipe� to both task list usages.

Restrict the task list usage ## Until order release.

5. Defining a control key

Define control key K1## "Cost., Sched., Capa. Grp.##" and K2## "Cost.,Sched., Capa., QM Grp.##'".

Set the Scheduling indicator, Capacity Requirements indicator, and Costindicator for both control keys.

For control key K2##, also set the Inspection Characteristics Required indicator.

Confirmation for phases with these control keys should be possible.

6. Defining the field selection

Which field groups of the basic data screen group are defined as required entriesfor resource category 0008?

_______________________ and _______________________

Task 2:Data on capacity requirements planning

1. Creating capacity categories

Create the capacity category M## "Processing unit##" and P## "PersonnelGroup##".

Define capacity category P## as a Labor capacity. Which function is madepossible by setting the CapCatPers indicator?

______________________________________________




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


______________________________________________

Save your entries.

2. Defining an area of responsibility for capacity requirements planning.

Define the responsible capacity requirements planner group C## "Cap. plannergrp.##".

3. Defining default capacities

Define default capacities for the capacity categories M## and P## in plant 1100.

Define the following default values for both capacity categories:

Planner group C##Factory calendar ID 01Base unit of measure HStandard avail. capacity Start: 00:00:00

Finish: 24:00:00Capacity utilization 100No. Single cap. 1

The capacity categories are to be relevant for finite scheduling. This meansthat the available capacity is taken into account during capacity requirementsplanning.

Task 3:Creating formulas for resources

1. Defining formula parameters

Define the following formula parameters:




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Param. Origin Keywords

Dim. Stdvalue

Stdvalueunit

Fieldname

DF## 2 Dura-tion,fixed

TIME H

DV## 2 Dura-tion,variable

TIME H

BAQU## Basequantity

1 BMSCH

PHQU## Phaseqty

1 MGVRG

Hint: The parameters DF## and DV## are the standard values for aphase.

The parameters BAQU## and PHQU## are general operation values ofthe recipe or process order. The operation values are transferred to theformula parameters by way of their field names.

2. Defining a standard value key

Define the standard value key SK## "Fixed and variable time group##" andassign the standard values DF## and DV## to it.

Also set the Generate indicator. You use this indicator to control whether acoding command is generated for a standard value.

3. Defining formula keys

Define the following formulas:

Formula Description Formula definitionFIX## Duration, fixed DF##VAR## Duration, qty-dep. DV## * PHQU## / BAQU##DUR## Total duration DF## +DV## * PHQU## /

BAQU##

Set the Generate indicator for each one.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Also allow the use of the formula for costing, capacity requirements planning,and scheduling.

Task 4:Creating a resource

1. Defining a default resource

Define a default resource for resource category RE## in plant 1100.

Basic Data tab

Description ResourcePerson responsible R##Task list usage O##Standard value key SK##

Specify that the system does not check the standard values.

Default Values tab

Control key K1##

Capacities tab

Capacity category M##Formula DUR##

Scheduling tab


Costing tab




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Cost center 4250

Activity type

Duration, fixed

1420

Activity type

Duration, variable

1420

Formula key

Duration, fixed

FIX##

Formula key

Duration, variable

VAR##

Record category group

Duration, variable

Edit

Save your default resource.

2. Creating a resource based on the default resource

Create resource T-DTM1## of the resource category RE## in plant 1100.

When you maintain the resource data, the system suggests values you entered forthe default resource in Customizing.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Enter Charging vessel grp.## as the resource description on the Basic Datascreen.

Copy the other default values suggested on the Basic Data screen withoutchanging them.

Go through the other detail screens on:

� Default values

� Capacities

� Scheduling

� Costing

by navigating to the corresponding tab pages.

While doing this, pay attention to the messages in the status bar.

Hint: The default values will not be copied automatically from thedefault resource until you run through the detail screens.

Save your resource.

3. Creating resources with reference to existing resources

In plant 1100, create the resources in the following table that are of the categoryRE## by copying the source T-DTM1##.

Select all the views that are offered for selection on the Copy from Templateand choose Copy.

You only have to maintain the resource description and perhaps the task listusage on the Basic Data screen. You can then save the resource without goingthrough further detail screens. All of the data from the screens you selectedare copied from the source.

Create the following resources:

Resource Description Task list usageT-DTR1## Reaction vessel 1 grp ## O##T-DTR2## Reaction vessel 2 grp ## O##




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Resource Description Task list usageT-DTR3## Reaction vessel 3 grp ## O##T-DTA1## Cooling tank grp ## O##T-DTG1## Preliminary reaction

vessel grp ##C##

How does task list usage C## restrict resource T-DTG1##?

_____________________________________________

_____________________________________________

Task 5:Capacities

1. Displaying the capacity data of a resource

Display the capacity data of your cooling tank T-DTA1##.

Which capacity category is assigned to it? Why?

_____________________________________________

_____________________________________________

Display the capacity header data of the capacity category assigned.

Where was the header data of this resource capacity originally created?

_____________________________________________

_____________________________________________

2. Creating a pooled capacity with available capacity intervals

Create a pooled capacity POOL-## (personnel pool group##) of the capacitycategory P## in plant 1100.

The data that is maintained as the default capacity for each plant and capacitycategory in Customizing is automatically copied.

Set the Pooled capacity indicator.

Set the Can be used by several operations indicator.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


The standard available capacity has an operation time of 24 hours. An averageof 10 single capacities is available in the standard available capacity, and therate of capacity utilization is 100%. Maintain the standard available capacityaccordingly.

Enter the detailed information for the available capacity of your pooled capacity.Define an available capacity interval for the active version 1 �Normal availablecapacity� according to the following information.

Choose Intervals and shifts.

Choose the Insert Interval icon.

Make the following entries on the Add Available Capacity Intervals screen:

Valid from: 'Today'Valid to: 'End of this year'Length of cycle: 1No. of shifts: 3Work days: 1 (overrides factory calendar)

Specify the following shifts on the screen 'Create capacities: views:

SNo. Start Finish Breaks No.1 00:00:00 08:00:00 01:00:00 82 08:00:00 16:00:00 01:00:00 123 16:00:00 24:00:00 01:00:00 10

After defining your shifts, choose F3 'Back'.

Check the available capacity interval that is valid at the moment on the 'CreateCapacity: Intervals of Available Capacity' screen.

Save your pooled capacity.

3. Assigning a pooled capacity

Assign your pooled capacity POOL-## of the capacity category P## to yourcooling tank T-DTA1##.

Check whether the capacity data has been copied correctly to the resource.

Save the resource.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


4. Referencing a capacity

Reference the available capacity of capacity LINE-99 of capacity category 099to your capacity category M## in the current resource T-DTA1##.

Choose Reference avail. cap. in the header data for capacity category M##.

After entering the capacity on the Reference Available Capacity screen, youreference the available capacity by choosing Continue. You cannot process theavailable capacity within the resource.

You also have the option of copying the available capacity and then changingit by choosing Copy.

Save your resource.

Display and check the referenced capacity LINE-99.

Task 6:Formulas

1. Formulas in the Resource

On which screens is a formula key used to reference a formula defined inCustomizing? Display, for example, the resource T-DTA1## again.

______________________

______________________

______________________

What is calculated with each of the formulas?

_________________________________________

_________________________________________

_________________________________________

2. Displaying and testing formulas in a resource

You can display the formulas that are assigned by means of the formula keys onthe resource screens. You can also test the formulas.

Display the formulas defined on the Capacities, Scheduling and Costing screensfor one of your resources and write down the formulas.

_________________________________________

_________________________________________




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


_________________________________________

For example, test the formula on the Scheduling screen:

General operation values: (for example)

Operation qty: 1,000 kgBase quantity: 100 kg

Standard values (for example)

Duration, fixed: 10 HDuration,variable: 1 H

Choose Calculate...

3. Formula constants of a resource

Assign the formula constant RESPOW Resource Activity to one of yourresources.

Note: Resource constants can be used as parameters in the formula forcosting, capacity requirements determination, and scheduling. This maybe useful for resources, for example, that have activity-dependent output.

Resource→ Change /

(for example) Scheduling tab /

Extras→ Formula→ Formula constants

Param. Value UNRESPOW (for example) 10000 W

Which origin must be specified for a formula parameter in Customizing so that itcan be used as a resource constant?

_________________________________________

Task 7:Resource selection requirements

1. Creating a resource network




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Create a resource network NETZ-## according to the following graphic inplant 1100.


Make the following entries on the Header Data screen:

Description Resource network group ##Person responsible R##

Assign the resources according to the network shown in the graphic above.

Enter reasonable selection conditions, such as:

Plant: 1100Resource category: RE##Person responsible: R##

On the Resource Allocation screen, select the resources and go to graphicalmaintenance.

Create the resource network shown above in the graphic.

Save your resource network.

2. Displaying the network relationships of a resource

Display, for example, the data on the network relationships for reaction vesselT-DTR2## in the resource master record.

3. Classification of Resources

Classify your reaction vessel in class REAC_## Reaction vessel of the classcategory 019 Work center class.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Assign values to the characteristics assigned for the individual reaction vesselsin the following way:

T-DTR1## T-DTR2## T-DTR3##Surface G (Glass) P (Polyethylene) S (Stainless steel)

steel)Rev. per min 20 - 80 20 - 40 20 - 60

Save your data.

Hint: Classification is carried out for the purpose of system-aidedresource selection in the process order.

Task 8:Reporting

Resources / Reporting -> < ...>

1. Resources list

Display all resources in your area of responsibility R## for plant 1100.

Note: Double-click one of the resources listed to display thecorresponding resource data.

2. Cost center assignment

Display the cost center that is assigned to your resources.

Plant: 1100Work center: T-DT*##

Note: Double-click the objects listed to display data for the resources,cost centers, and activity categories.

3. Resource capacities

Display the capacities that are assigned to your resources.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y



Note: Double-click the capacities listed to display the correspondingcapacity data.

4. Where-used list

In which master recipe is, for example, the resource T-IC101 from plant 1100used?

In which resources is the capacity POOL-## from plant 1100 used?



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Solution 10: Creating Resources andFurther Maintenance ActivitiesTask 1:Basic Customizing settings for resources

In this exercise, you will become familiar with the most important Customizingsettings for resources. Documentation is available for the individual Customizingactivities, which you can display if you need help when making Customizing settings.Furthermore, you can use the F1 and F4 help for data maintenance.

1. Basic Customizing settings for resources

a) Customizing:

SAP Customizing Implementation Guide→ Production Planning forProcess Industries→ Master Data→ Resource→ (...)

2. Defining a resource category

Define the resource category RE## "Processing unit group". ##'.

Reference to the field selection and the screen sequence of the existing resourcecategory 0008.

Specify that change documents are to be written for the resources of the categoryRE##.

Assign the task list usage for recipes to the resource category RE##.

a) (...) → Resource→ General Data→ Define Resource Category (WorkCenter Category)

3. Defining a person responsible for a resource

Define the person responsible R## "Person responsible for resource group##" forplant 1100.

a) (...) → General Data→ Determine Person Responsible

4. Defining a task list usage

Define the task list usages O## "Recipe & Order group##" and C## "Recipeuntil release, group##".

Assign the task list type �Master recipe� to both task list usages.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Restrict the task list usage ## Until order release.

a) (...) → General Data→ Define Task List Usage

5. Defining a control key

Define control key K1## "Cost., Sched., Capa. Grp.##" and K2## "Cost.,Sched., Capa., QM Grp.##'".

Set the Scheduling indicator, Capacity Requirements indicator, and Costindicator for both control keys.

For control key K2##, also set the Inspection Characteristics Required indicator.

Confirmation for phases with these control keys should be possible.

a) (...) → Resource→ Task List Data (Master Recipe)→ Define Control Keys

6. Defining the field selection

Which field groups of the basic data screen group are defined as required entriesfor resource category 0008?

_______________________ and _______________________

a) (...) → Resource→ General Data→ Define Field Selection

Position the cursor on the Basic Data screen group. Choose Influencingand enter 0008 (resource category processing unit) as the influencingvalue. Choose Enter.

The following are required fields:

Task list use and Person Responsible

Task 2:Data on capacity requirements planning

1. Creating capacity categories

Create the capacity category M## "Processing unit##" and P## "PersonnelGroup##".


______________________________________________

______________________________________________




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Save your entries.

a) Customizing: (...) → Resource→ Capacity Requirements Planning→Define Capacity Categories


You set this indicator to specify that persons can be assigned to thiscapacity category as individual capacities.

2. Defining an area of responsibility for capacity requirements planning.

Define the responsible capacity requirements planner group C## "Cap. plannergrp.##".

a) (...) → Capacity Requirements Planning→ Determine Capacity Planner

3. Defining default capacities

Define default capacities for the capacity categories M## and P## in plant 1100.

Define the following default values for both capacity categories:

Planner group C##Factory calendar ID 01Base unit of measure HStandard avail. capacity Start: 00:00:00

Finish: 24:00:00Capacity utilization 100No. Single cap. 1

The capacity categories are to be relevant for finite scheduling. This meansthat the available capacity is taken into account during capacity requirementsplanning.

a) (...) → Capacity Requirements Planning→ Define Default Capacity

Task 3:Creating formulas for resources

1. Defining formula parameters

Define the following formula parameters:




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Param. Origin Keywords

Dim. Stdvalue

Stdvalueunit

Fieldname

DF## 2 Dura-tion,fixed

TIME H

DV## 2 Dura-tion,variable

TIME H

BAQU## Basequantity

1 BMSCH

PHQU## Phaseqty

1 MGVRG

Hint: The parameters DF## and DV## are the standard values for aphase.

The parameters BAQU## and PHQU## are general operation values ofthe recipe or process order. The operation values are transferred to theformula parameters by way of their field names.

a) (...) → General Data→ Standard Value→ Define Parameters

2. Defining a standard value key

Define the standard value key SK## "Fixed and variable time group##" andassign the standard values DF## and DV## to it.

Also set the Generate indicator. You use this indicator to control whether acoding command is generated for a standard value.

a) (...) → General Data→ Standard Value→ Define Standard Value Key

3. Defining formula keys

Define the following formulas:




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Formula Description Formula definitionFIX## Duration, fixed DF##VAR## Duration, qty-dep. DV## * PHQU## / BAQU##DUR## Total duration DF## +DV## * PHQU## /

BAQU##

Set the Generate indicator for each one.

Also allow the use of the formula for costing, capacity requirements planning,and scheduling.

a) (...) → Capacity Requirements Planning→ Formulas for Resources (WorkCenters)→ Define Formulas for Resources (Work Centers)

Task 4:Creating a resource

1. Defining a default resource

Define a default resource for resource category RE## in plant 1100.

Basic Data tab

Description ResourcePerson responsible R##Task list usage O##Standard value key SK##

Specify that the system does not check the standard values.

Default Values tab

Control key K1##

Capacities tab





I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Scheduling tab


Costing tab

Cost center 4250

Activity type

Duration, fixed

1420

Activity type

Duration, variable

1420

Formula key

Duration, fixed

FIX##

Formula key

Duration, variable

VAR##

Record category group

Duration, variable

Edit




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Save your default resource.

a) Customizing: (...) → Resource→ General Data→ Define DefaultResource (Work Center)

Enter the data as described in the exercise.

2. Creating a resource based on the default resource

Create resource T-DTM1## of the resource category RE## in plant 1100.

When you maintain the resource data, the system suggests values you entered forthe default resource in Customizing.

Enter Charging vessel grp.## as the resource description on the Basic Datascreen.

Copy the other default values suggested on the Basic Data screen withoutchanging them.

Go through the other detail screens on:

� Default values

� Capacities

� Scheduling

� Costing

by navigating to the corresponding tab pages.

While doing this, pay attention to the messages in the status bar.

Hint: The default values will not be copied automatically from thedefault resource until you run through the detail screens.

Save your resource.

a) SAP Easy Access menu: (�)→ Resources→ Resource→ Create


3. Creating resources with reference to existing resources

In plant 1100, create the resources in the following table that are of the categoryRE## by copying the source T-DTM1##.

Select all the views that are offered for selection on the Copy from Templateand choose Copy.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


You only have to maintain the resource description and perhaps the task listusage on the Basic Data screen. You can then save the resource without goingthrough further detail screens. All of the data from the screens you selectedare copied from the source.

Create the following resources:

Resource Description Task list usageT-DTR1## Reaction vessel 1 grp ## O##T-DTR2## Reaction vessel 2 grp ## O##T-DTR3## Reaction vessel 3 grp ## O##T-DTA1## Cooling tank grp ## O##T-DTG1## Preliminary reaction

vessel grp ##C##


_____________________________________________

_____________________________________________

a) Enter the data as described in the exercise.


The indicator �Usage only until release in order� was set for the task listusage in Customizing. An operation with this resource cannot be releasedin the process order. Before releasing it, you must replace the resource bya resource that physically exists.

Task 5:Capacities

1. Displaying the capacity data of a resource

Display the capacity data of your cooling tank T-DTA1##.


_____________________________________________

_____________________________________________





I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y



_____________________________________________

_____________________________________________

a) Display the capacity data of a resource in the resource: Capacities tab


M##

You entered this capacity category in the default resource.


Choose Capacity Header Data.


When you defined the default capacity for capacity category M##.

2. Creating a pooled capacity with available capacity intervals

Create a pooled capacity POOL-## (personnel pool group##) of the capacitycategory P## in plant 1100.

The data that is maintained as the default capacity for each plant and capacitycategory in Customizing is automatically copied.

Set the Pooled capacity indicator.

Set the Can be used by several operations indicator.

The standard available capacity has an operation time of 24 hours. An averageof 10 single capacities is available in the standard available capacity, and therate of capacity utilization is 100%. Maintain the standard available capacityaccordingly.

Enter the detailed information for the available capacity of your pooled capacity.Define an available capacity interval for the active version 1 �Normal availablecapacity� according to the following information.

Choose Intervals and shifts.

Choose the Insert Interval icon.

Make the following entries on the Add Available Capacity Intervals screen:




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Valid from: 'Today'Valid to: 'End of this year'Length of cycle: 1No. of shifts: 3Work days: 1 (overrides factory calendar)

Specify the following shifts on the screen 'Create capacities: views:

SNo. Start Finish Breaks No.1 00:00:00 08:00:00 01:00:00 82 08:00:00 16:00:00 01:00:00 123 16:00:00 24:00:00 01:00:00 10

After defining your shifts, choose F3 'Back'.

Check the available capacity interval that is valid at the moment on the 'CreateCapacity: Intervals of Available Capacity' screen.

Save your pooled capacity.

a) SAP Easy Access menu: (�)→ Resources→ Capacity→ Create

3. Assigning a pooled capacity

Assign your pooled capacity POOL-## of the capacity category P## to yourcooling tank T-DTA1##.

Check whether the capacity data has been copied correctly to the resource.

Save the resource.

a) (�)→ Resource→ Change

Capacities tab

Choose Create Capacity

Enter the pooled capacity you want to assign and the required capacitycategory.

To check whether the capacity data has been copied correctly to theresource,

Choose Capacity Header Data




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


4. Referencing a capacity

Reference the available capacity of capacity LINE-99 of capacity category 099to your capacity category M## in the current resource T-DTA1##.

Choose Reference avail. cap. in the header data for capacity category M##.

After entering the capacity on the Reference Available Capacity screen, youreference the available capacity by choosing Continue. You cannot process theavailable capacity within the resource.

You also have the option of copying the available capacity and then changingit by choosing Copy.

Save your resource.

Display and check the referenced capacity LINE-99.

a) Reference a capacity in resource T-DTA## to capacity category M##

Choose Capacity Header Data

Choose Reference avail. cap.

To display capacity LINE-99:

SAP Easy Access menu: (�)→ Resources→ Capacity→ Display

Task 6:Formulas

1. Formulas in the Resource

On which screens is a formula key used to reference a formula defined inCustomizing? Display, for example, the resource T-DTA1## again.

______________________

______________________

______________________


_________________________________________

_________________________________________




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


_________________________________________

a) On which screens is a formula key used to reference a formula defined inCustomizing?

Capacities

Scheduling

Costing


Capacity requirement determination per phase

Execution time calculation per phase

Activity determination of the standard values per phase to create aproduction cost estimate.

2. Displaying and testing formulas in a resource

You can display the formulas that are assigned by means of the formula keys onthe resource screens. You can also test the formulas.

Display the formulas defined on the Capacities, Scheduling and Costing screensfor one of your resources and write down the formulas.

_________________________________________

_________________________________________

_________________________________________

For example, test the formula on the Scheduling screen:

General operation values: (for example)

Operation qty: 1,000 kgBase quantity: 100 kg

Standard values (for example)

Duration, fixed: 10 HDuration,variable: 1 H




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Choose Calculate...

a) Display the formulas defined on the Capacities, Scheduling and Costingscreens for one of your resources and write down the formulas.

Extras→ Formula→ Display

DUR## Duration, fixed + Duration, variable * Phase qty / Base qty

FIX## Duration, fixed

VAR## Duration, variable * Phase qty / Base qty

For example, test the formula on the Scheduling screen

Extras→ Formula→ Test

Choose Calculate...

3. Formula constants of a resource

Assign the formula constant RESPOW Resource Activity to one of yourresources.

Note: Resource constants can be used as parameters in the formula forcosting, capacity requirements determination, and scheduling. This maybe useful for resources, for example, that have activity-dependent output.

Resource→ Change /


Extras→ Formula→ Formula constants

Param. Value UNRESPOW (for example) 10000 W

Which origin must be specified for a formula parameter in Customizing so that itcan be used as a resource constant?




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


_________________________________________

a) (�)→ Resource→ Change /


Extras→ Formula→ Formula constants ...

Which origin must be specified for a formula parameter in Customizing sothat it can be used as a resource constant?

F1 help for �Param." field on "Formula Constants" screen:

Origin 1 �Work center constant�

Task 7:Resource selection requirements

1. Creating a resource network

Create a resource network NETZ-## according to the following graphic inplant 1100.


Make the following entries on the Header Data screen:

Description Resource network group ##Person responsible R##

Assign the resources according to the network shown in the graphic above.

Enter reasonable selection conditions, such as:




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Plant: 1100Resource category: RE##Person responsible: R##

On the Resource Allocation screen, select the resources and go to graphicalmaintenance.

Create the resource network shown above in the graphic.

Save your resource network.

a) SAP Easy Access menu: (�)→ Resources→ Resource Network→ Create

For resource allocation, choose Resource Allocation.

For graphical maintenance, choose the Graphic icon.

2. Displaying the network relationships of a resource

Display, for example, the data on the network relationships for reaction vesselT-DTR2## in the resource master record.

a) (�)→ Resource→ Display

Goto→ Network→ Relationships

→ Relationship Detail

→ Header

→ Graphic

3. Classification of Resources

Classify your reaction vessel in class REAC_## Reaction vessel of the classcategory 019 Work center class.

Assign values to the characteristics assigned for the individual reaction vesselsin the following way:

T-DTR1## T-DTR2## T-DTR3##Surface G (Glass) P (Polyethylene) S (Stainless steel)

steel)Rev. per min 20 - 80 20 - 40 20 - 60




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Save your data.

Hint: Classification is carried out for the purpose of system-aidedresource selection in the process order.

a) (�)→ Resource→ Change /

Choose Classification

Task 8:Reporting

Resources / Reporting -> < ...>

1. Resources list

Display all resources in your area of responsibility R## for plant 1100.

Note: Double-click one of the resources listed to display thecorresponding resource data.

a) (�)→Reporting→ Resources List

2. Cost center assignment

Display the cost center that is assigned to your resources.


Note: Double-click the objects listed to display data for the resources,cost centers, and activity categories.

a) (�)→ Reporting→ Cost Center Assignment

3. Resource capacities

Display the capacities that are assigned to your resources.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y



Note: Double-click the capacities listed to display the correspondingcapacity data.

a) (�)→ Reporting→ Resource Capacity

4. Where-used list

In which master recipe is, for example, the resource T-IC101 from plant 1100used?

In which resources is the capacity POOL-## from plant 1100 used?

a) (�)→Reporting→ Where-Used List→ Resource

(�)→ Reporting→ Where-Used List→ Capacity



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Create resources� Make the basic Customizing settings for resources� Create resource networks� Classify resources for system-aided resource selection� Carry out reporting for resources



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Unit Summary

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:� Explain the structure of a resource master record.� Maintain available capacities� Create formulas and assign them in resource master records.� Create resources� Make the basic Customizing settings for resources� Create resource networks� Classify resources for system-aided resource selection� Carry out reporting for resources



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit Summary PLM115



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Test Your Knowledge

1. Name the screens of a resource master record.

2. How is the term Capacity defined? According to which criterion are capacitiesoverwritten?

3. Which information is calculated in the process order on the basis of formulas ofthe assigned resources?

4. What are the different ways for creating a resource?



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Answers

1. Name the screens of a resource master record.

Answer:

� Basic data� Default values� Capacities� Scheduling� Costing

2. How is the term Capacity defined? According to which criterion are capacitiesoverwritten?

Answer: A capacity is the ability of a resource to perform a task with regardto time.Capacities are differentiated according to capacity categories.

3. Which information is calculated in the process order on the basis of formulas ofthe assigned resources?

Answer:

� Execution times� Capacity requirements� Production costs

4. What are the different ways for creating a resource?

Answer:

� Manually� By using a predefined default value in Customizing� As a copy of another resource



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit 6Production Version

Unit OverviewThis chapter introduces you to production versions.


� Explain the definition and the interface of a production version.� Create, change, and delete production versions and check their consistency� Use mass processing for production versions to navigate to the master recipe

and BOM

Unit ContentsLesson: Production Version - Overview.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206Lesson: Maintaining Production Versions .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209

Exercise 11: Maintaining Production Versions... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit 6: Production Version PLM115

Lesson: Production Version - Overview

Lesson OverviewThis lesson familiarizes you with the definition and the interface of a productionversion.


� Explain the definition and the interface of a production version.

Business ExampleYou familiarize yourself with the definition and structure of a production version.

Production Version

Figure 65: Production Version



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Lesson: Production Version - Overview

User Interface

Figure 66: User Interface

Maintaining Production Versions

� You can maintain production versions:

� In mass processing (recommended; required for approval procedures usingchange orders)

� In the master recipe� In the material master



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Explain the definition and the interface of a production version.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Lesson: Maintaining Production Versions

Lesson: Maintaining Production Versions

Lesson OverviewThis lesson familiarizes you with the maintenance activities for production versions.


� Create, change, and delete production versions and check their consistency� Use mass processing for production versions to navigate to the master recipe

and BOM

Business ExampleYou create the production versions for the materials to be produced in your company.

In every production version, you define the master recipe and BOM to be used forthe corresponding production process.

Mass Processing: Overview

Figure 67: Mass Processing: Overview



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


You can select a worklist of production versions to be processed in the maintenancetransaction Production Version: Mass Processing.

The worklist allows you to carry out both mass processing and individual processingof production versions.

Mass Processing: Information and Functions

Figure 68: Mass Processing: Information and Functions

From the worklist, you can perform all maintenance activities, such as creating,copying, changing, displaying, and deleting production versions.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Recommended Recipe Processing

Figure 69: Recommended Recipe Processing

From mass processing of production versions, you can navigate to the correspondingmaster recipe and create or edit the recipe or alternative BOM there. From theproduction version, you can thus access all production-related master data.

You can assign a change number or engineering change order to a productionversion in mass processing only (and not in the material master record or masterrecipe). This is then also valid for recipe and BOM maintenance.

In this way, an approval procedure must be applied consistently to all objectsbelonging together by way of the assignment of an engineering change order.

When you create process orders that require approval, the system uses the numberof the engineering change order to check whether the production version has beenapproved.

A production version is considered approved when it meets the following requirements(see also the unit Engineering Change Management and Recipe Approval):

� The master recipe assigned to the production version has a change rule thatrequires an engineering change order with or without a change type.

� The production version has been assigned a change number that complies withthis change rule.

� The relevant engineering change order has been released. This means you canno longer use it for changes.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Production versions whose change rule requires an engineering change order cannotbe processed until a valid engineering change order was assigned.

Note: In the standard system, you can therefore not edit production versions whosechange rule requires an engineering change order in the material master record.

Note: Unlike recipe editing with a change master record or engineering change order,you do not create a new change status for the production version. You only assignthe change number to it in the worklist of mass processing. You may need to adjustthe validity period of the production version manually.

Production Version Consistency

Figure 70: Production Version Consistency

In order for a production version to be consistent, it must fulfill the followingrequirements:

� The lot-size range of the production version must be in the lot-size range of theassigned recipe as well as that of the assigned alternative BOM. This appliesto all change statuses of the recipe and alternative BOM that are in the validityperiod of the production version.

� The assigned recipe and alternative BOM must exist during the whole validityperiod of the production version. The deletion flag must not be set for them.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Consistency Check

Figure 71: Consistency Check

You can check whether the data of a production version is consistent with the data ofthe master recipe and the data of the alternative BOM assigned to it. You can thenbe sure that a valid recipe or valid BOM actually exists within the whole validityperiod of the production version.

If the data is not consistent, an error or warning message is given in the inspectionresult.

After the check, the date of the last check and the check status are updated.

The recipe, task list, or BOM are assigned one of the following statuses in theproduction version:

� Last check ok (green light)� Not yet checked (yellow light)� Last check with error (red light)



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Locking a Production Version

Figure 72: Locking a Production Version

You can lock production versions (for any usage).

If the check result is negative, a production version is not automatically locked. Ifrequired, you can set the lock indicator manually.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Exercise 11: Maintaining ProductionVersions

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Create, change, and delete production versions and check their consistency� Use mass processing for production versions to navigate to the master recipe

and BOM

Business ExampleYou create the production versions for the materials to be produced in your company.

In every production version, you define the master recipe and BOM to be used forthe corresponding production process.

Task 1:Creating a production version

1. Create production version 0001 for material T-FD1## in plant 1100 according tothe following specifications:

Production version text DetergentFrom lot size 1000To lot size 20000Valid from TodayValid to No entry = maximum validity dateDetailed planningTask list type Master recipeGroup T-DET1##Group counter 1BOMAlternative BOM 1BOM usage 1 Production




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


2. Which warnings appear after detail maintenance for the production version?

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

3. Use the Application help to find out more about the symbol that appears in theProcessing status column. What does this symbol mean?

______________________________________________________

Save your production version.

Task 2:Copying and changing production versions

Create production versions as copies of existing production versions.

Then change the copies.

You can, for example, proceed as described in the following exercise:

1. Copy production version 0001 to production version 0002 and change thenumber of the alternative BOM from 1 to 2.

2. Copy production version 0002 to production version 0003 and change theValid-from date from today to today + 2 months on the detail screen. Alsochange the number of the alternative BOM from 2 to 3.

3. Copy production version 0001 to production version 0004 and change the lot-sizerange 1000 - 20000 to 20000 - 30000. Also change the group counter from 1 to 2.

Then save the production versions.

Task 3:Consistency check for production version / processing status

1. Perform a consistency check for one or more production versions of materialT-FD1##.

2. Which messages appear in the consistency log?

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


3. How do you recognize that a consistency check has been performed for theseproduction versions?

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

4. What is displayed in the Processing status column?

______________________________________________________

Save the production versions.

5. How does the processing status change after you saved?

______________________________________________________

Task 4:Production version in the material master

1. The production versions that you created in the previous exercises are defined inthe master data record of material T-FD1##.

Display the production versions in the material master (MRP 4 view).



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Solution 11: Maintaining ProductionVersionsTask 1:Creating a production version

1. Create production version 0001 for material T-FD1## in plant 1100 according tothe following specifications:

Production version text DetergentFrom lot size 1000To lot size 20000Valid from TodayValid to No entry = maximum validity dateDetailed planningTask list type Master recipeGroup T-DET1##Group counter 1BOMAlternative BOM 1BOM usage 1 Production

a) SAP Standard Menu→ Logistics→ Production - Process→ MasterData→ Production Versions

Enter plant 1100 and material T-FD1## as your selection conditions.

Choose the Create production version icon.

The Maintenance Production Version: Detail Screen appears.


2. Which warnings appear after detail maintenance for the production version?

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


______________________________________________________

a) The following warnings appear:

"Valid to" date is automatically set to the maximum

No task list available.

No BOM available.

3. Use the Application help to find out more about the symbol that appears in theProcessing status column. What does this symbol mean?

______________________________________________________

Save your production version.

a) Help→ Application help

The symbol means the following:

stands for Production version is new

Task 2:Copying and changing production versions

Create production versions as copies of existing production versions.

Then change the copies.

You can, for example, proceed as described in the following exercise:

1. Copy production version 0001 to production version 0002 and change thenumber of the alternative BOM from 1 to 2.

a) Copy production version 0001 to production version 0002:

Select production version 0001.

Choose the Copy production version icon.

Enter number 0002 in the Copy / Prod. Version field.

Choose Enter.

Then enter alternative BOM 2 for production version 0002 in massprocessing or on the detail screen.

Choose Enter to confirm warnings.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


2. Copy production version 0002 to production version 0003 and change theValid-from date from today to today + 2 months on the detail screen. Alsochange the number of the alternative BOM from 2 to 3.

a) Copy production version 0002 to production version 0003.


Choose the Copy production version icon.

Enter number 0003 in the Copy / Prod. Version field.

Choose Enter.

Change the Valid-from date and the Alternative BOM as described in theexercise.


3. Copy production version 0001 to production version 0004 and change the lot-sizerange 1000 - 20000 to 20000 - 30000. Also change the group counter from 1 to 2.

Then save the production versions.

a) Copy production version 0001 to production version 0004.

Copy production version 0001 as described above.

Change the lot-size range and the group counter as described in the exercise.


Task 3:Consistency check for production version / processing status

1. Perform a consistency check for one or more production versions of materialT-FD1##.

a) Select one or more production versions.

Choose the Consistency check icon.

The consistency log for the production versions appears.

2. Which messages appear in the consistency log?

______________________________________________________




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


______________________________________________________

a) The consistency log contains the following error messages:

Task list is not available.

BOM is not available.

Choose Back.

3. How do you recognize that a consistency check has been performed for theseproduction versions?

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

a) The current date was entered in the Check date column. In addition, thetest status Check with errors was set (red traffic light).

4. What is displayed in the Processing status column?

______________________________________________________


a) The Processing status column shows that the production version datawas changed.

Note: The production version is therefore locked for other usersuntil you save it.


5. How does the processing status change after you saved?

______________________________________________________

a) The following changes when you save:

The symbol in the Processing status column disappears.

Note: The production version is now unlocked again.

Task 4:Production version in the material master

1. The production versions that you created in the previous exercises are defined inthe master data record of material T-FD1##.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Display the production versions in the material master (MRP 4 view).


Choose MRP4 view.

Choose ProdVersions.

On the Production Version Overview screen, the production versions justcreated are listed.

Choose Details to navigate to the Production Version Details screen.

Hint: If you enter the material master in the change mode, youcan also create, check, and delete production versions in thisway, provided the production versions do not belong to approvedrecipes.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Create, change, and delete production versions and check their consistency� Use mass processing for production versions to navigate to the master recipe

and BOM



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit Summary PLM115

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:� Explain the definition and the interface of a production version.� Create, change, and delete production versions and check their consistency� Use mass processing for production versions to navigate to the master recipe

and BOM



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Test Your Knowledge

1. What is does a production version determine?

2. Name some of the functions available in the mass processing for maintainingproduction versions.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Answers

1. What is does a production version determine?

Answer: A production version determines which master recipe is used togetherwith which material BOM to produce a material.

2. Name some of the functions available in the mass processing for maintainingproduction versions.

Answer:

� Change (detail maintenance)� Create� Delete� Copy� Consistency check� Assign change number� Navigation in master recipe (create, change)



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit 7Master Recipes (I)

Unit OverviewThis chapter introduces you to the maintenance of the header, transaction and phasedata of a master recipe.


� Describe the basic structure of a master recipe.� Create and maintain the header, operation, and phase data of a master recipe� Carry out scheduling in the master recipe

Unit ContentsLesson: Master Recipes: Overview ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228

Exercise 12: Master Recipes: Overview .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233Lesson: Creating Header and Operation Data.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238

Exercise 13: Creating Header and Operation Data ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit 7: Master Recipes (I) PLM115

Lesson: Master Recipes: Overview

Lesson OverviewThis lesson provides an overview of the elements, structure and functions of a masterrecipe.


� Describe the basic structure of a master recipe.

Business ExampleTo map the production process onto the system in more detail, you must create therelevant master recipes and BOMs.

First of all, find out the basic structure of a master recipe.

Elements of a Master Recipe

Figure 73: Elements of a Master Recipe



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Lesson: Master Recipes: Overview

A master recipe defines the following data that is required for the production ofmaterials without relating to a particular order: processing steps, resources, materialcomponents, data for quality inspection during production, and control informationfor the process control level.

The master recipe is the basis for the creation of process orders. A process orderdescribes an actual production process and contains, for example, production datesand quantities to be produced.

A control recipe contains all the information necessary for the execution of a processorder by a certain process control system or process operator. Control recipes aregenerated from the process instructions in a process order and transferred to thecorresponding destination in process control. Process instructions are defined in themaster recipe on which the process order is based.

Functions of a Master Recipe

Figure 74: Functions of a Master Recipe



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Recipe and Recipe Group

Figure 75: Recipe and Recipe Group

You always create a master recipe in a recipe group. You can create several recipes ina recipe group, for example, for organizational reasons.

Thus, a master recipe is identified by its recipe group and a recipe counter.

Master recipes that belong to the same recipe group can be assigned to different plants.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Structure of the Master Recipe

Figure 76: Structure of the Master Recipe

The recipe header contains data that is valid for the whole recipe. Operationsdescribe the different steps required during the production process. For a moredetailed description of these steps, phases are assigned to the operations.

Exactly one resource is assigned to an operation. This assignment of the resourceis also valid for all phases that belong to the operation.

The processing sequence of the phases is defined in relationships.

The material list is made up of components representing the materials entering andleaving the production process, as well as temporarily existing materials and theirplanned quantities. It also defines the assignment of these material components to thephases of the recipe according to their planned appearance in the process.

In material quantity calculation, you define formulas to calculate the materialquantities to be used or obtained in a production process, taking into account themixing ratios of the ingredients, yield ratios of the products and remaining materialsas well as specific material attributes (for example, active ingredient).



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Exercise 12: Master Recipes: Overview

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Describe the basic structure of a master recipe

Business ExampleTo map the production process onto the system in more detail, you must create therelevant master recipes and BOMs. First of all, find out about the basic structureof a master recipe.

Task:Elements and structure of a master recipe

1. Go to mass processing for production versions.

Select the production version(s) for plant 1100 and master recipe group T-ICE##.

For production version 0001 of material T-FI1##, get an overview of the datain the corresponding master recipe.

2. Operation overview

Familiarize yourself with the operations, phases, and resources assigned.

3. Relationships

Display the relationships defined between the phases in the operation graphic.

4. Recipe header data

Display the recipe header data.

Navigate to the material assignments.

Which materials are assigned to the recipe as products?

________________________

________________________

________________________

5. Material list




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Familiarize yourself with the material components that are assigned to the recipefor product T-FI1##.

Which material components are assigned?

In which quantities are the material components required?

To which operations or phases are the material components assigned?

Material Quantity Operation / Phase

(5 examples are sufficient)



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Solution 12: Master Recipes: OverviewTask:Elements and structure of a master recipe

1. Go to mass processing for production versions.

Select the production version(s) for plant 1100 and master recipe group T-ICE##.

For production version 0001 of material T-FI1##, get an overview of the datain the corresponding master recipe.

a) (�)→ Production � Process→ Master Data→ Production Versions

Plant: 1100

Task list type: 2

Task list group: T-ICE##

Choose Enter.

Select production version 0001 of material T-FI1##.

Choose Recipe

On the Parameters for Recipe Maintenance dialog box:

Choose the Display Recipe icon


Familiarize yourself with the operations, phases, and resources assigned.

a) Operations tab

3. Relationships

Display the relationships defined between the phases in the operation graphic.

a) Operations tab

Operation Graphic icon



Navigate to the material assignments.


________________________Continued on next page



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


________________________

________________________

a) Choose the Recipe Header tab


Choose Material Assignments.

T-FI1##

T-FI2##

T-FI3##

5. Material list

Familiarize yourself with the material components that are assigned to the recipefor product T-FI1##.

Which material components are assigned?

In which quantities are the material components required?

To which operations or phases are the material components assigned?

Material Quantity Operation / Phase

(5 examples are sufficient)

a) First navigate to the Recipes tab.

Then select the recipe and choose the Materials icon.

Material Quantity Operation / PhaseT-RI0## 0.1 KG 1010T-RI1## 0.12 KG 1010T-RI2## 0.16 KG 1010T-RI3## 0.02 KG 1010T-RI4## 0.02 KG 1010



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Describe the basic structure of a master recipe.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson: Creating Header and Operation Data

Lesson OverviewThis chapter introduces you to the maintenance of the header and operation dataof a master recipe.


� Create and maintain the header, operation, and phase data of a master recipe� Carry out scheduling in the master recipe

Business ExampleYou have created production versions for the materials to be produced in yourcompany. In production versions, you have defined the master recipe and BOM to beused for each product.

To map the production process onto the system in more detail, you must now createthe relevant master recipes and BOMs.

First, you create the header, operation, and phase data for your recipes.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Lesson: Creating Header and Operation Data

Creating Master Recipes and BOMs

Figure 77: Creating Master Recipes and BOMs

Profile

� Default values for the master recipe:

� The operation� The relationship� Process defaul maintenance� The relationship graphic� Changeability

� Quality assurance default values

When creating a master recipe, you must enter a profile defined in Customizing.

You find the default values defined in the profile in the Extras menu of the masterrecipe.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Recipe header data

� Recipe group, recipe counter, recipe description, plant� Resource network� Status� Usage� Planner group� Charge quantity range� Change rule� Material-recipe assignment� QM data is� Long text� Administrative data

Data that is valid for the whole recipe is maintained at the recipe header level.

The status provides information on the processing status of a recipe (for example,creation phase, released for order, released for costing) and controls which businessoperations are allowed or not allowed. The usage describes the purpose for which therecipe can be used (for example, production, construction, plant maintenance). Theplanner group specifies a group of people who are responsible for the maintenanceof the recipe.

With the charge quantity range, you specify a value range that is allowed for theproduction quantity and for which the master recipe may be used as the reference fora process order in production.

By defining a change rule, you can specify how the recipe can be changed (withoutrule, with change number, with engineering change order).

The materials to be produced using the recipe are assigned to the recipe at the headerlevel.

To give more information, you can create a long text for the recipe header.

On the QM Data recipe header detail screen, you can define the type of in-processinspection.

Administrative data provides information on the validity of the recipe as far as timeis concerned, as well as on the persons who have created or changed the recipe. It alsotells you whether a change was made using a change number.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Maintaining Operations and Phases

Figure 78: Maintaining Operations and Phases

(*) If the recipe intends the process default maintenance using XSteps, then controlrecipe recipients and process defaults cannot be maintained for the phases.

The maintenance is then carried out using the XSteps editor of the recipe.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Operation Overview

Figure 79: Operation Overview

You must enter a control key for each operation and phase. The control keydetermines how an operation or phase is to be processed in functions such as processorders, costing, and capacity requirements planning.

Control keys are defined in Customizing. You can set a number of different indicatorsspecifying, for instance:

� Whether scheduling is to be carried out for the phase� Whether capacity load records are to be written for the phase� Whether the phase is costed� Whether a goods receipt is to be posted automatically for the process order

when a confirmation is received� Whether time tickets are to be printed for the operation or phase� Whether inspection characteristics have to be maintained for the operation or

phase

Note: Scheduling, determination of capacity requirements, and costing take place atphase level. The dates and capacity requirements for operations are derived from thecorresponding phases.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Standard and Default Values from the Resource

Figure 80: Standard and Default Values from the Resource

When you assign a resource to an operation, you also assign the standard and defaultvalues maintained in the resource to the phases of the operation.

You can use a rule for maintenance to specify whether a standard value for a phasemay be, should be, or has to be entered. In the resource, you can also maintain defaultvalues for the units of measure of the standard values.

The default values are then either copied into the operation or phase, giving you thepossibility to later change them, or they are referenced into the operation or phase,thus making further changes impossible. In the latter case, a reference indicator is setfor the relevant default value in the resource.

Using the standard text key, you can assign a standard text created previously tothe description of an operation or phase.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Relationships

Figure 81: Relationships

The time-based sequence of phases is determined by relationships. Relationships linkthe start and finish points of phases. This enables you, for instance, to synchronizephases belonging to different operations.

Relationships Between Master Recipes

Figure 82: Relationships Between Master Recipes

Phases from different recipes can be linked using relationships.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Assigning Secondary Resources

Figure 83: Assigning Secondary Resources

Exactly one (primary) resource is assigned to an operation. The primary resourceis that part of a line or processing unit at which the operation is carried out. It iscommitted for the entire duration of the operation.

The primary resource is also assigned to all phases subordinate to the operation inthe hierarchy.

If required, you can assign additional secondary resources to operations and phases.This assignment can be carried out with a flexible start and finish time, relative to thestart or finish of the operation or phase.

You must assign a control key to each secondary resource. The same businesstransactions can be carried out for secondary resources as for operations andphases. Secondary resources can, for example, be included in scheduling, capacityrequirements planning, and costing.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Scheduling in the Master Recipe

Figure 84: Scheduling in the Master Recipe

Scheduling a master recipe enables a time-based simulation of the manufacturingprocess in the planning phase. During scheduling, the start and finish times of phasesare determined. Scheduling takes place at phase level only. The operation dates arederived from the phase dates.

To be able to carry out scheduling, you must maintain default values for phases aswell as relationships between phases.

Starting from the basic start or basic finish dates, scheduling is carried out either asforward or backward scheduling. You can enter a planned lot size if the phase durationdepends on the quantity to be processed.

The scheduling result can either be displayed in a table or graphically in a Ganttchart. Due to the relationships, phase dates can have certain time buffers. Therefore,the earliest and latest start and finish dates are determined in scheduling.

The scheduling result can be used to update the in-house production time in thematerial master record of the material assigned via the production version.

Depending on the scheduling type, the float before production is either added to thebasic start date, or the float after production is subtracted from the basic finish date. Inthis way you can determine the planned start and finish dates of production (scheduledstart date, scheduled finish date).

The float before production and float after production are time buffers enabling you toreact to disturbances in the manufacturing process. You can assign them to the materialin the MRP view of the material master record using the scheduling margin key.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Phase Duration

Figure 85: Phase Duration

To calculate the phase duration, you must specify a capacity category in the resourceas the scheduling basis and define a formula in the resource.

The phase duration is determined on the basis of the standard values and additionalformula parameters.

When calculating the phase dates, the available capacity of the scheduling basisincluding breaks is taken into account.

Scheduling takes place via the phases. The operation dates are derived from the phasedates.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Classification of Operations and Resources

Figure 86: Classification of Operations and Resources

Using classes of class type 019 work center type, you can classify resources as well asoperations contained in master recipes.

You can thus use the characteristics of a class of class type 019 in two ways: first, youcan store specific resource attributes and second, you can define selection conditions aresource must meet if it is to be used in an operation of a master recipe.

The characteristic values of classified operations represent the selection conditionsfor system-aided resource selection in the process order.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Checking the Recipe / Consistency Log

Figure 87: Checking the Recipe / Consistency Log

If you want to check whether the data for your recipe is complete and consistent,choose Check Recipe Group.

After the recipe is checked, warnings, information, and errors are collected for therecipe check in a consistency log.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Exercise 13: Creating Header and OperationData

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Create and maintain the header, operation, and phase data of a master recipe� Carry out scheduling in the master recipe� Classify operations for system-aided resource selection

Business ExampleYou have created production versions for the materials to be produced in yourcompany. In production versions, you have defined the master recipe and BOM to beused for each product.

To map the production process onto the system in more detail, you must now createthe relevant master recipes and BOMs.

First, you create the header, operation, and phase data for your recipes.

Task 1:Creating a master recipe

1. Go to mass processing for production versions. Select the production version(s)for plant 1100 and material T-FD1##.

Create a master recipe for production version 0001 based on the followinginformation:

Data on recipe maintenance access:

Key date: Valid-from date of ProdVersProfile: 0001

2. Data for recipe header

a) The Create Master Recipe: Recipe screen appears. Enter the following dataon the Recipe header tab page:




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Recipe description: Recipe for detergent production, grp##

Plant: 1100Status: 4 �Released general�Use: 1 "Production"Planner group: 001 �Planner group 001�Resource network: NETZ-##Charge quantity range: 1000 � 20000 L

b) Header text

Create a long text that describes the recipe in more detail.

Choose the Header Text icon.

Long text: Recipe for detergent production, grp ## ##, exothermic reaction.

c) Administrative data

Display the administrative data.

Administrative Data tab

3. Operations and phases

a) Creating operations and phases and assigning resources

Create operations and phases for your recipe 1 of the recipe group T-DET1##based on the data in the following table. Assign the resources shown on the table.

Operations tab

Op Ph SOp CRD Resource Descrip-tion

100 T-DTM1## CHARG-ING

110 x 100 EN Charge120 x 100 EN Mix130 x 100 EN Add water140 x 100 EN Discharge




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y



200 T-DTG1## REAC-TION

210 x 200 EN Charge220 x 200 EN Add

Butanoland NaOH

230 x 200 EN Discharge300 T-DTA1## COOL-

ING310 x 300 EN Charge320 x 300 EN Cool330 x 300 EN Discharge

Save your master recipe.

b) Control key

Use the input help (F4) to display detailed information about the control keyK1##.

Which indicators are set?

____________________

____________________

____________________

Based on the indicators that have been set, what happens to a phase marked withthis control key in the process order?

______________________________________

______________________________________

______________________________________

Use field help (F1) to display information about the functions of the differentindicators.

c) Text (for operation / for phase)




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Create the following text for operation 200.

Choose the Text icon.

Text: Reaction

Resource selection conditions have been defined for the operation so that asuitable reaction vessel can be selected.

d) Administration data

Display the administrative data for an operation or a phase.

e) Maintaining standard values

Maintain the standard values for the phases of your recipe according to theinformation in the following table.

The quantity-dependent durations should each refer to a base quantity of 1000 L.

Phase Duration,fixed

Act. type Duration,variable

Act. type

(1st std.value)

(2nd std.value)

1420

110 10 min 1420120 30 min 1420130 10 min 1420140 10 min 1420210 10 min 1420220 30 min 1420230 10 min 1420310 10 min 1420320 5 h 1420330 20 min 1420

4. a) Assigning a secondary resource

Add the secondary resource T-DTT1## "Transport vehicle" for phase 330.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Sec.res. Resource Plant Description0001 T-DTT1## 1100 Discharge into

transport unit

b) Text (for secondary resource)

Enter the following text for your secondary resource.

Text:

Discharge into transport unit

15 minutes before charging begins

the transport vehicle must be connected.

It cannot be detached until 10

minutes after charging is

finished.

c) Standard value and earliest and latest dates

Define the standard value and the earliest and latest dates of your secondaryresource according to the following information.

Duration: 45 min.Offset to start: 15 min.Offset to finish: 10 min.


Display the administrative data for your secondary resource.

Save your recipe.

5. Relationships

a) Graphical maintenance / maintenance by means of the GenerateRelationships function

Create the relationships between the phases of your recipe as shown in thefollowing graphic.

Use graphical maintenance and/or the Generate Relationships function.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 88: Graphical Maintenance

b) Maintenance on the phase detail screen

Maintain the last relationship

320------330

in the detail screen for phase 320.

Successor Phase Relationshiptype

Rcp. grp Recipe

X 330

FS

Finish - start

T-DET1## 1

Display the detail information for this relationship.

Choose the Detail icon for the relationship you created.

Display the administrative data for this relationship.


c) Displaying information in graphical maintenance

Go back to the graphic display of the relationships.

Double-click a phase.

Which phase detail screen appears?

____________________

Double-click a line connecting two phases. Which relationship detail screenappears?

____________________

Save your recipe.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Task 2:Classifying operations

1. Classify the operation 200 in the class REAC_## "Reaction vessel".

Assign the following values to the characteristics:

Surface coating PRevolutions per Min. 30


Hint: The classification of the operation defines the selection conditionsfor a system-aided resource selection in the process order.

Task 3:Scheduling

Suggestion: Do the following exercise for different charge quantities.

1. Scheduling overview

Simulate order scheduling in your master recipe.

On the operation overview,

Schedule Recipe icon

Display the result in the scheduling overview.

2. Gantt chart

Display the scheduling results in the Gantt chart.

Choose the Gantt Chart icon.

Select a suitable time unit.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Solution 13: Creating Header and OperationDataTask 1:Creating a master recipe

1. Go to mass processing for production versions. Select the production version(s)for plant 1100 and material T-FD1##.

Create a master recipe for production version 0001 based on the followinginformation:

Data on recipe maintenance access:

Key date: Valid-from date of ProdVersProfile: 0001

a) (...) → Production versions

Select the production version for material T-FD1##

Select production version 0001 of material T-FD1##.

Choose Recipes.

Parameters for Recipe Maintenance dialog box:

Edit Recipe icon

2. Data for recipe header

a) The Create Master Recipe: Recipe screen appears. Enter the following dataon the Recipe header tab page:

Recipe description: Recipe for detergent production, grp##

Plant: 1100Status: 4 �Released general�Use: 1 "Production"




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Planner group: 001 �Planner group 001�Resource network: NETZ-##Charge quantity range: 1000 � 20000 L

b) Header text

Create a long text that describes the recipe in more detail.

Choose the Header Text icon.

Long text: Recipe for detergent production, grp ## ##, exothermic reaction.

c) Administrative data

Display the administrative data.


a) Maintain the data as described in the exercise.

3. Operations and phases

a) Creating operations and phases and assigning resources

Create operations and phases for your recipe 1 of the recipe group T-DET1##based on the data in the following table. Assign the resources shown on the table.

Operations tab


100 T-DTM1## CHARG-ING

110 x 100 EN Charge120 x 100 EN Mix130 x 100 EN Add water140 x 100 EN Discharge200 T-DTG1## REAC-

TION210 x 200 EN Charge




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y



220 x 200 EN AddButanoland NaOH

230 x 200 EN Discharge300 T-DTA1## COOL-

ING310 x 300 EN Charge320 x 300 EN Cool330 x 300 EN Discharge


b) Control key

Use the input help (F4) to display detailed information about the control keyK1##.


____________________

____________________

____________________

Based on the indicators that have been set, what happens to a phase marked withthis control key in the process order?

______________________________________

______________________________________

______________________________________

Use field help (F1) to display information about the functions of the differentindicators.

c) Text (for operation / for phase)

Create the following text for operation 200.


Text: Reaction




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Resource selection conditions have been defined for the operation so that asuitable reaction vessel can be selected.


Display the administrative data for an operation or a phase.

e) Maintaining standard values

Maintain the standard values for the phases of your recipe according to theinformation in the following table.

The quantity-dependent durations should each refer to a base quantity of 1000 L.

Phase Duration,fixed

Act. type Duration,variable

Act. type

(1st std.value)

(2nd std.value)

1420

110 10 min 1420120 30 min 1420130 10 min 1420140 10 min 1420210 10 min 1420220 30 min 1420230 10 min 1420310 10 min 1420320 5 h 1420330 20 min 1420

a) Creating

operations and phases and assigning resources

Operations tab

b) Control key


Position the cursor on the control key




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


F4 input help

In the control key overview:

Position the cursor on the control key

Choose Detailed Information.


Scheduling

Det. Cap. Reqmnts

Cost

Based on the indicators that have been set, what happens to a phase markedwith this control key in the process order?

The phase is scheduled

Capacity requirement records are generated

The costs of the phase are calculated

c) Text

Select operation 200


d) Administrative data

Double-click the Operation/phase number


e) On the Operations tab:

Double-click the respective Phase Number

Standard Values tab

You can also maintain the standard values directly in the operationoverview.

4. a) Assigning a secondary resource

Add the secondary resource T-DTT1## "Transport vehicle" for phase 330.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Sec.res. Resource Plant Description0001 T-DTT1## 1100 Discharge into

transport unit

b) Text (for secondary resource)

Enter the following text for your secondary resource.

Text:

Discharge into transport unit

15 minutes before charging begins

the transport vehicle must be connected.

It cannot be detached until 10

minutes after charging is

finished.


Define the standard value and the earliest and latest dates of your secondaryresource according to the following information.

Duration: 45 min.Offset to start: 15 min.Offset to finish: 10 min.


Display the administrative data for your secondary resource.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Save your recipe.

a) Assigning a secondary resource

On the Operations tab:

Selection of phase 330

Secondary Resource icon

b) Text

On the Secondary Resources tab:

Select the Secondary Resource



Double-click the item number of the secondary resource

Standard Values tab

d) Administrative data


5. Relationships

a) Graphical maintenance / maintenance by means of the GenerateRelationships function

Create the relationships between the phases of your recipe as shown in thefollowing graphic.

Use graphical maintenance and/or the Generate Relationships function.

Figure 89: Graphical Maintenance


Maintain the last relationship

320------330

in the detail screen for phase 320.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Successor Phase Relationshiptype

Rcp. grp Recipe

X 330

FS

Finish - start

T-DET1## 1

Display the detail information for this relationship.

Choose the Detail icon for the relationship you created.

Display the administrative data for this relationship.



Go back to the graphic display of the relationships.



____________________

Double-click a line connecting two phases. Which relationship detail screenappears?

____________________




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Save your recipe.

a) Graphical maintenance:

in the operation overview (Operations tab):


Maintained using the function Generate Relationships:

in the operation overview (Operations tab):

Generate Relationship icon



Double-click phase number 320

Relationships tab


Operations tab




Phase standard values

Double-click a line connecting two phases.

Which relationship detail screen appears?

General relationship data

Task 2:Classifying operations

1. Classify the operation 200 in the class REAC_## "Reaction vessel".

Assign the following values to the characteristics:




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Surface coating PRevolutions per Min. 30


Hint: The classification of the operation defines the selection conditionsfor a system-aided resource selection in the process order.

a) On the Operations tab:

Select operation 200

Icon Resource selection conditions or Goto→ Res. sel. cond.

Task 3:Scheduling

Suggestion: Do the following exercise for different charge quantities.

1. Scheduling overview

Simulate order scheduling in your master recipe.



Display the result in the scheduling overview.

a) On the operation overview,


2. Gantt chart

Display the scheduling results in the Gantt chart.

Choose the Gantt Chart icon.

Select a suitable time unit.

a) Choose the Gantt Chart icon.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Create and maintain the header, operation, and phase data of a master recipe� Carry out scheduling in the master recipe



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Unit Summary

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:� Describe the basic structure of a master recipe.� Create and maintain the header, operation, and phase data of a master recipe� Carry out scheduling in the master recipe



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit Summary PLM115



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Test Your Knowledge

1. Describe the structure of a master recipe. Name the most important elements.

2. Name some important data that has to be maintained with reference to phases.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Answers

1. Describe the structure of a master recipe. Name the most important elements.

Answer:

� Recipe header� Operation overview: operations, resources, phases, relationships� Material list: material components, material quantity calculation

2. Name some important data that has to be maintained with reference to phases.

Answer:

� Control key� Standard values� Relationships� Control recipe destinations� Process instructions



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit 8Master Recipes (II)

Unit OverviewThis chapter introduces you to the maintenance of material components for a masterrecipe.


� Describe the connection between recipe, BOM and material list� Create a BOM for a master recipe� Maintain the material list of a master recipe� Classify BOM components� Maintain formulas for material quantity calculation.� Describe the use of the material quantity calculation using the example scenario

presented.

Unit ContentsLesson: Materials in the Master Recipe ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274Lesson: Creating BOM and Material List .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277

Exercise 14: Creating BOM and Material List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283Lesson: Material Quantity Calculation ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291

Exercise 15: Material Quantity Calculation .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295Lesson: Example Scenario for Material Quantity Calculation.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit 8: Master Recipes (II) PLM115

Lesson: Materials in the Master Recipe

Lesson OverviewThis lesson introduces you to the connection between recipe, BOM and material list.


� Describe the connection between recipe, BOM and material list

Business ExampleTo map the production process onto the system in more detail, you must create therelevant master recipes and BOMs. You now find out about the basic connectionbetween recipe, BOM and material list.

Typical Material Flow in the Process Industry

Figure 90: Typical Material Flow in the Process Industry

The graphic uses two examples of operations carried out at the primary resourcescharge vessel and reaction vessel to show a typical material flow in processmanufacturing.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Lesson: Materials in the Master Recipe

The graphic shows:

� Ingredients entering the production process� The temporary appearance of an intermediate product between two processing

units, which continues to be processed without leaving the process. Suchmaterials are assigned material type INTR Intra material.

� By-products produced during the manufacturing process� The use of a catalyst that enters the process at a certain point of time and leaves

it again later.� The manufacture of one or more products If several planned materials are

manufactured during one production run, they are called co-products.

Recipe, BOM, and Material List

Figure 91: Recipe, BOM, and Material List



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Describe the connection between recipe, BOM and material list



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Lesson: Creating BOM and Material List

Lesson: Creating BOM and Material List

Lesson OverviewThis lesson introduces you to the maintenance activities for creating BOM andmaterial lists.


� Create a BOM for a master recipe� Maintain the material list of a master recipe� Classify BOM components

Business ExampleAfter having maintained the header, operation, and phase data, you now create thematerial BOM for your master recipe.

In the material list, you then assign the material components to your phases.

For batch determination and material quantity calculation, you classify the relevantBOM items.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Creating Master Recipes and BOMs (II)

Figure 92: Creating Master Recipes and BOMs (II)

Bill of Material: Example

Figure 93: Bill of Material: Example

The graphic shows the structure of a bill of material (BOM) for a material.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


The product is assigned to the BOM header. A base quantity is defined in the BOMheader and the quantities of the material components entered in the BOM items referto this base quantity.

BOM items are, for example:

� Ingredients, intra materials, catalyst, by-products, co-products

Quantities of materials entering the production process are maintained with a positivenumber, quantities of materials leaving the process with a number followed by anegative sign. Materials that both enter and leave the process are assigned twodifferent BOM items with the corresponding signs.

If a BOM item is a co-product, the corresponding indicator must be set for this item. Inaddition to this, the co-product assigned to the BOM header as well as the co-productslisted as BOM items must be marked as co-products in their material master records.

Material BOM data is, for example, important for:

� Material requirements planning� Material staging during production� Product costing

BOM Item Categories

Figure 94: BOM Item Categories



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


A BOM item category specifically designed for the process industry is category �M�for intra materials.

The item category determines, for example:

� Whether you must enter a material number� Whether quantity-based inventory management is to be carried out for this item� Which sign is to be entered for the item quantity� Whether subitems can be used� What the screen selection and the screen layout of the item detail screens look

like

Note that you cannot change the item category once you have created an item. Youcan only correct a wrong item category assignment by deleting the item and creatingit again.

Material List

Figure 95: Material List

In the material list, the material components of the BOM are assigned to the phasesaccording to their appearance in the process.

A specific material list component is assigned to exactly one phase. You can assignseveral different material components to a phase.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Classification of BOM Components

Figure 96: Classification of BOM Components

BOM components can be classified with class type batch in the master recipe. Youthus store specific attributes that the planned material components must possess in theform of characteristic values for individual BOM items.

BOM components are classified for the purpose of batch determination and materialquantity calculation:

The characteristic values defined in the process order are used as selection criteriaduring batch determination.

The characteristic values can be used in the formulas of material quantity calculation.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Exercise 14: Creating BOM and Material List

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Create a BOM for a master recipe� Maintain the material list of a master recipe� Classify BOM components

Business ExampleAfter having maintained the header, operation, and phase data, you now create thematerial BOM for your master recipe.

In the material list, you then assign the material components to your phases.

For batch determination and material quantity calculation, you classify the relevantBOM items.

Task 1:Material-recipe assignment

1. Your master recipe T-DET1## describes the production of the material T-FD1##.

Check the material assignment in the recipe header.

When was the material assignment for the recipe defined?

____________________________________________________________

Task 2:Creating BOM and material list for material assigned

Now create the BOM and material list with reference to the assigned materialT-FD1##.

1. BOM for material T-FD1##

First, go to the Materials tab in your recipe.

The initial screen for BOM maintenance appears. After releasing the data(Enter), you can assign the required material components in the BOM. Make thefollowing assignments:




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Item ICt Component Quantity0010 L T-RD1## 975 L0020 L T-RD2## 400 L0030 N T-RD3## 1,225 L0040 L T-RD4## 1,000 L0050 L T-RD5## 1400 L

Enter 5000 L as the base quantity in the BOM header.

Choose the Header icon.

2. Material list for material T-FD1##

Choose F3 "Back".

The material list for the recipe (Materials view) appears. Assign the materialcomponents to the phases of your recipe according to the following table:

Component PhaseT-RD1## 110T-RD2## 110T-RD3## 130T-RD4## 220T-RD5## 220

Save your recipe.

Task 3:Checking the production version

1. Perform a consistency check for production version 0001 of your materialT-FD1##.

Which information appears in the consistency log?

____________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________

What is the new check status for the production version?




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


____________________________________________________________

Task 4:Classification of BOM components

1. In your master recipe T-DET1##, classify the BOM component T-RD1##.

Hint: You must classify the BOM components so you can carry outsystem-aided batch determination in the process order.

Which class of class type 023, Batch is assigned to the BOM item?

Why?

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

Define the following values for the class characteristics as batch selectionconditions:





I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Solution 14: Creating BOM and Material ListTask 1:Material-recipe assignment

1. Your master recipe T-DET1## describes the production of the material T-FD1##.

Check the material assignment in the recipe header.

When was the material assignment for the recipe defined?

____________________________________________________________

a) Use the Production Version transaction to access your recipeT-DET1##.

In the recipe,

Choose the Recipe Header tab

Choose Material Assignments.

Material assignment was defined when production version 0001 formaterial T-FD1## was created.

Task 2:Creating BOM and material list for material assigned

Now create the BOM and material list with reference to the assigned materialT-FD1##.

1. BOM for material T-FD1##

First, go to the Materials tab in your recipe.

The initial screen for BOM maintenance appears. After releasing the data(Enter), you can assign the required material components in the BOM. Make thefollowing assignments:

Item ICt Component Quantity0010 L T-RD1## 975 L0020 L T-RD2## 400 L0030 N T-RD3## 1,225 L0040 L T-RD4## 1,000 L0050 L T-RD5## 1400 L




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Enter 5000 L as the base quantity in the BOM header.


a) Go to the Materials tab in your recipe.

Screen: Create Material BOM: Initial Access

Choose Enter.

Enter the material components

to enter the base quantity:


2. Material list for material T-FD1##

Choose F3 "Back".

The material list for the recipe (Materials view) appears. Assign the materialcomponents to the phases of your recipe according to the following table:

Component PhaseT-RD1## 110T-RD2## 110T-RD3## 130T-RD4## 220T-RD5## 220

Save your recipe.

a) In the BOM header,choose F3 (Back).

Materials tab

For the individual slides:

Choose the Create Assignment icon.

Task 3:Checking the production version

1. Perform a consistency check for production version 0001 of your materialT-FD1##.

Which information appears in the consistency log?Continued on next page



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


____________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________

What is the new check status for the production version?

____________________________________________________________

a) In the mass maintenance for production versions:

Choose the Consistency Check icon.

Consistency log:

Task list is available (no warning or errors)

BOM is available (no warning or errors)

Check status:

Check without errors (green traffic light)

Task 4:Classification of BOM components

1. In your master recipe T-DET1##, classify the BOM component T-RD1##.

Hint: You must classify the BOM components so you can carry outsystem-aided batch determination in the process order.


Why?

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

Define the following values for the class characteristics as batch selectionconditions:





I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y



a) In your master recipe T-DET1##, classify the BOM component T-RD1##.

(�)→ Production Versions


Choose Recipes.

Materials tab

Choose BOM.

Select T-RD1##.

Extras→ Batch classification.


Why?

023_14

Raw material T-RD1## was classified in this class in the "Aspects of BatchManagement� unit..

The BOM item inherits the classification from the material master.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Create a BOM for a master recipe� Maintain the material list of a master recipe� Classify BOM components



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Lesson: Material Quantity Calculation

Lesson: Material Quantity Calculation

Lesson OverviewThis lesson introduces you to material quantity calculation.


� Maintain formulas for material quantity calculation.

Business ExampleIn material quantity calculation, you then define the formulas for calculating theproduct quantity, component quantities, and operation and phase quantities.

Material Quantity Calculation

Figure 97: Material Quantity Calculation



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


In material quantity calculation, you define formulas to calculate the materialquantities to be used or obtained in a production process, taking into account themixing ratios of the ingredients, yield ratios of the products and by-products as well asspecific batch characteristic (for example, concentration).

You can also define formulas for calculating phase quantities in material quantitycalculation.

By using batch determination together with material quantity calculation, you canperform active ingredient management in a process order.

Material Quantity Calculation Screen

Figure 98: Material Quantity Calculation Screen

The numbers in brackets define a "cell" consisting of line and column numbers (seekey).



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


The detail functions of material quantity calculation are:

� Choose the Formula icon

This function selects the cell on which you have positioned the cursor and entersit in the formula section of the screen.

� Insert in Formula icon

This function copies the coordinates of line and column in the formula section,such as [003,001].

� Save Formula icon

This function saves formulas but does not transfer the values into the material list.

� Save Formula and Copy Result

Saves all formulas and then transfers the values to the material list and BOM.

� Formula Overview icon

This function contains the quantities and value fields plus the correspondingformulas. References used in the formulas are replaced by the value and thedescription of the field to which they refer.

� Calculate Product Quantity

The system calculates the product quantity and subsequently updates allcomponent, operation, phase, and scrap quantities for which formulas havebeen defined.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Exercise 15: Material Quantity Calculation

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Define formulas for material quantity calculation

Business ExampleIn material quantity calculation, you then define the formulas for calculating theproduct quantity, component quantities, and operation and phase quantities.

Task:Material Quantity Calculation

1. Go to material quantity calculation in your master recipe.

First, position the cursor on the formula field and choose input help (F1).Comprehensive information on material quantity calculation is displayed.

Then, familiarize yourself with the individual elements and functions of materialquantity calculation. To do so, use the information provided on the relevantpages in your participant handbook.

2. Familiarize yourself with formula maintenance in material quantity calculationby defining, for example, formulas for phase quantity calculation.

Examples:

You obtain the quantity of phase 110 by adding the quantities of componentsT-RD1## and T-RD2##.

The quantity of phase 120 corresponds to the quantity of phase 110.

You obtain the quantity of phase 130 by adding the quantities of componentsT-RD1##, T-RD2## and T-RD3##.

(...)

Save the formulas and your recipe.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Solution 15: Material Quantity CalculationTask:Material Quantity Calculation

1. Go to material quantity calculation in your master recipe.

First, position the cursor on the formula field and choose input help (F1).Comprehensive information on material quantity calculation is displayed.

Then, familiarize yourself with the individual elements and functions of materialquantity calculation. To do so, use the information provided on the relevantpages in your participant handbook.

a) In the material list for your master recipe, choose the Material quantitycalculation (a/b) icon.

2. Familiarize yourself with formula maintenance in material quantity calculationby defining, for example, formulas for phase quantity calculation.

Examples:

You obtain the quantity of phase 110 by adding the quantities of componentsT-RD1## and T-RD2##.

The quantity of phase 120 corresponds to the quantity of phase 110.

You obtain the quantity of phase 130 by adding the quantities of componentsT-RD1##, T-RD2## and T-RD3##.

(...)




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Save the formulas and your recipe.

a) Example :

Calculation of the quantity of phase 110:

Position the cursor in the quantity field of phase 110 (row 3, column 1).

Choose Select formula.

You can now enter the formula for phase quantity calculation in theformula field.

The connection applies:

Quantity Phase 110 = Quantity T-RD1## + Quantity T-RD2##

To define this formula, you can proceed as follows:

Position the cursor in the quantity field of component T-RD1## (row 4,column 1).

Choose Insert in Formula.

The formula field now states: [004,001]

Choose the operand + . The formula field now states: [004,001] +

Position the cursor in the quantity field of component T-RD2## (row 5,column 1).

Choose Insert in Formula.

The formula field now contains the complete formula: [004,001] +[005,001]

Choose Save Formula and call up the material quantity calculation again.

Check the result.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Maintain formulas for material quantity calculation.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Lesson: Example Scenario for Material Quantity Calculation

Lesson: Example Scenario for Material QuantityCalculation

Lesson OverviewThis lesson familiarizes you with an example scenario for using the material quantitycalculation.


� Describe the use of the material quantity calculation using the example scenariopresented.

Business ExampleYou have to use the material quantity calculation in collaboration with the batchdetermination and using proportion units, in order to represent special processes of theactive ingredient management.

Batch Determination and Material Quantity Calculation:General Process

Figure 99: Batch Determination and Material Quantity Calculation: GeneralProcess



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Master Recipe for Sample Scenario

Figure 100: Master Recipe for Sample Scenario



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Batch Determination and Material Quantity Calculation:Sample Scenario (I)

Figure 101: Batch Determination and Material Quantity Calculation: SampleScenario (I)

After the process order has been created, the planned quantities and plannedcharacteristic values for the Fruit juice product and the material components areavailable.

In our scenario, the values of the Fruit content and Acidity characteristics of the Fruitjuice product are the fixed target values of production. All other values are variable.

After the process order has been created, batch determination is carried out for theFruit premix component in our scenario. Batch determination settings specify thatthe batches must always be used up. The batches are available in containers of 1200L. You must withdraw enough containers so that you do not fall below the plannedproduction quantity. An overdelivery is allowed.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Batch Determination and Material Quantity Calculation:Sample Scenario (II)

Figure 102: Batch Determination and Material Quantity Calculation: SampleScenario (II)

Since production requirements make it necessary to withdraw more fruit premix andsince the characteristic values of the assigned batch deviate from the planned values,material quantity calculation must be used to recalculate the production quantitiesfor the Fruit juice, the proportion quantities for the Lemon juice, and the Sugar andWater quantities.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Batch Determination and Material Quantity Calculation:Sample Scenario (III)

Figure 103: Batch Determination and Material Quantity Calculation: SampleScenario (III)

Afterwards, batch determination is carried out for the Citric acid based on therecalculated proportion quantity. In our scenario, the required quantity is chargedfrom a big storage tank.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Batch Determination and Material Quantity Calculation:Sample Scenario (IV)

Figure 104: Batch Determination and Material Quantity Calculation: SampleScenario (IV)

Then material quantity is used to recalculate theWater quantity that needs to be addedbased on the production quantity (Fruit juice) and the added quantities of Fruit premixand Lemon juice.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Formulas for the Sample Scenario (I)

Figure 105: Formulas for the Sample Scenario (I)



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Formulas for the Sample Scenario (II)

Figure 106: Formulas for the Sample Scenario (II)



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Describe the use of the material quantity calculation using the example scenario

presented.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit Summary PLM115

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:� Describe the connection between recipe, BOM and material list� Create a BOM for a master recipe� Maintain the material list of a master recipe� Classify BOM components� Maintain formulas for material quantity calculation.� Describe the use of the material quantity calculation using the example scenario

presented.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Test Your Knowledge

1. Name some typical cases in the context of the material flow in processmanufacturing.

2. Name the basic steps in reference to the creation of BOMs and material lists fora master recipe in the context of integrated BOM maintenance.

3. Which quantity information can you calculate by means of the material quantitycalculations?

4. Describe the basic procedure of a material quantity calculation in collaborationwith the batch determination.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Answers

1. Name some typical cases in the context of the material flow in processmanufacturing.

Answer:

� Ingredients entering the production process� By-products produced during the manufacturing process� Manufacture of a product� Manufacture of several co-products

2. Name the basic steps in reference to the creation of BOMs and material lists fora master recipe in the context of integrated BOM maintenance.

Answer:

� Master recipe: navigation in BOM� Create material BOM

� Maintain material components� Maintain header data

� Navigate in master recipe� Maintain material list� If req., maintain material quantity calculation

3. Which quantity information can you calculate by means of the material quantitycalculations?

Answer:

� Product quantities� Material component quantities� Co-product and by-product quantities� Operation and phase quantities



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


4. Describe the basic procedure of a material quantity calculation in collaborationwith the batch determination.

Answer:

� Master recipe:

Definition of formulas for the material quantity calculation

� Creating a process order:

Selecting the master recipe and the material quantity calculation withplanned values

� Batch determination and subsequent material quantity calculation:

Adjusting the order quantities (components, product, operations, phases)for deviations in the batch characteristics

� Material staging and process order execution



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit Summary PLM115



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit 9Master Recipes (III)

Unit OverviewThis chapter introduces you to the maintenance of process instructions for a masterrecipe.


� Describe the principle of process management� Maintain control recipe destinations and process instructions in the master recipe� Design a simple PI sheet in the master recipe� Use reporting and mass processing functions for master recipes and BOMs� Copy master recipes across plants

Unit ContentsLesson: Process Management: Overview.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314Lesson: Maintenance of Process Instructions .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317

Exercise 16: Maintenance of Process Instructions ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325Lesson: Reporting, Mass Processing and Copying .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351

Exercise 17: Reporting, Mass Processing and Copying .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit 9: Master Recipes (III) PLM115

Lesson: Process Management: Overview

Lesson OverviewThis lesson provides an overview of the principle of process management.


� Describe the principle of process management

Business ExampleYou want to use the process management functions to link process control systems toyour system and create PI sheets. Find out about the principle of process managementfirst.

Process Management

Figure 107: Process Management



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Lesson: Process Management: Overview

Process management is the interface between PP-PI and the systems involved inprocess control. Due to its flexible structure, it can be linked to fully automated,partially automated, and manually operated lines. Process management comprisesthe following functions:

� Receiving control recipes with process instructions from released processorders The process instructions define, for example, the process steps to beexecuted and the process data to be confirmed (using process messages) inmore detail.

� Transferring control recipes to the corresponding process operators or processcontrol systems.

� If a process operator processes the control recipe manually: Displaying controlrecipes in natural language in the form of PI sheets that can be displayed andmaintained on the screen by the process operator

� Receiving, checking, and sending process messages with actual process datafrom the process control system or the PI sheet

Data is exchanged with process control systems using the PI-PCS interface.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Describe the principle of process management



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Lesson: Maintenance of Process Instructions

Lesson: Maintenance of Process Instructions

Lesson OverviewThis lesson introduces you to the possible maintenance alternatives for processinstructions.


� Maintain control recipe destinations and process instructions in the master recipe� Design a simple PI sheet in the master recipe

Business ExampleYou want to use the process management functions to link process control systems toyour system and create PI sheets.

For this, you must maintain the corresponding data structures for process control inthe form of process instructions in your master recipes.

For manually operated processes, you design PI sheets.

Alternatives of Process Instruction Maintenance

� Alternative 1 (All Releases)

� Presetting the process instruction types in Customizing� Maintenance of the process instructions based on copied process

instructions for the phases of the recipe/process order� Assigning the control recipe destinations to the phases� Definition of process instructions to be generated for the control recipe

destinations in Customizing.� Alternative 2 (As of SAP R/3 ERP and SCM Extension 2.00)

� Maintenance of all process instructions in XSteps (Execution Steps) in theXStep Editor of the recipe/process order

� Option of copy of reference of standard XSteps from the Standard XStepRepository

� Assigning the control recipe destination and maintenance of the generationscope, context and parameters for the XSteps



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Generating Control Recipes: Alternative 1

Figure 108: Generating Control Recipes: Alternative 1

A control recipe destination and any number of process instructions are assigned toeach phase of master recipe. (Automatically Generated Process Instruction can alsobe assigned directly to the control recipe destinations in Customizing.)

To execute an actual production process, a process order is created on the basis of amaster recipe. Together with the control recipe destinations and process instructions,the operation and phase structure is taken over from the master recipe.

For a released order, process management bundles the process instructions intocontrol recipes and transfers them to the relevant destination.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Maintenance Activities in the Recipe: Alternative 1

Figure 109: Maintenance Activities in the Recipe: Alternative 1

You create and maintain control recipe destinations in Customizing. In the masterrecipe, you assign the suitable control recipe destination from Customizing as areference per phase.

For the process instructions required in the recipe, you define process instructioncategories in Customizing. When you create a process instruction in the recipe, youmust choose a process instruction category from Customizing as the template to copyfrom. You can then tailor it according to the corresponding process.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Generating Control Recipes: Alternative 2

Figure 110: Generating Control Recipes: Alternative 2

As of SAP R/3 ERP and SCM Extension 2.00 (EA_APPL_2.00) the data for processmanagement can alternatively be maintained in the form of XSteps (Execution Steps).The use of XSteps enables the maintenance of process instructions in the form ofreusable modules that can be referenced. A Standard XStep Repository with versionmanagement is available.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Maintenance Activities in the Recipe: Alternative 2

Figure 111: Maintenance Activities in the Recipe: Alternative 2

In the XStep Editor of the master recipe, you create the required process instructionsfor XSteps.

An XSteps also includes information on the control recipe destination of the processinstructions, the phase assignment and the scope of generation.

When you create XSteps, you can reference standard XSteps from the StandardXStep Repository.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


PI Sheet

Figure 112: PI Sheet

The SAP PI sheet provides for processing on the screen, which means the processoperator is to enter, confirm, or complete data interactively.

Depending on the process instructions contained in a control recipe, the PI sheet hasthe following elements and functions, for example:

� Display of information on process (control instructions, notes, and so on)� Input fields and tables for entering process data, input validations, signatures� Batch determination and batch check� Process data calculation� Function calls for calling data from internal or external applications� Navigation to QM inspection results recording� Sequence definition for determining the processing sequence of phases� Comments on documentation and reporting of process events

As of Release 4.6C, you can generate PI sheets in HTML. The browser-based PI sheetenhances the ABAP list-based PI sheet. It gives you the advantage of a flexible,user-specific layout definition and allows you to define frames, for example, forlinking to documents, graphics, the internet and intranet.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


PI Sheet Simulation in the Master Recipe

Figure 113: PI Sheet Simulation in the Master Recipe

The effects process instructions and their characteristics have on the layout andstructure of the PI sheet become visible only after the control recipe has been created.To check the PI sheet beforehand, you can simulate a PI sheet in the master recipe.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Exercise 16: Maintenance of ProcessInstructions

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Maintain the data structures for process management in the master recipe� Develop the concept for a simple PI sheet in the master recipe based on preset

data structures

Business ExampleYou want to use the process management functions to link process control systems toyour system and create PI sheets.

For this, you must maintain the corresponding data structures for process control inthe form of process instructions in your master recipes.

For manually operated processes, you design PI sheets.

Task 1:Alternative 1: maintenance on the process instructions for the phases

Control recipe destinations and process instructions

1. Display the operation overview for recipe 1 of the recipe group COLORS.

2. Control recipe destinations

Which control recipe destinations have been assigned to the phases of the recipe?

Choose input help (F4) on the Destination field.

CtrRecDest Description of control recipe destination

____ __________________________________

____ __________________________________

3. Process instructions

Which process instruction categories are assigned to phase 1010?


Icon Process Instructions for phase 1010 process instruction type




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


___________________________

___________________________

___________________________

4. Process instruction characteristics

Which process instruction characteristics are assigned to the process instructionINSTR?

Choose the Process Instruction Details icon.

______________________________

______________________________

The characteristics PPPI_INSTRUCTION and PPPI_NOTE are each assigned along text. Display the long texts.

Choose Value.

5. PI sheet simulation

Simulate the PI sheet for the phases with control recipe destination 01.


Choose the Simulate PI Sheet icon.

Task 2:Defining a PI sheet in recipe T-DET1##

1. Create process instructions for your recipe T-DET1## according to theinformation in the following table.

Check and correct the texts and remove the process instruction characteristicsyou do not need.

Hint: The process instructions required for reporting material movementand order dates as well as other process instructions with informationon operations, phases, and material components are all defined asautomatically generated process instructions for the control recipedestination DE.

In this exercise, you only have to define process instructions for workinstructions and notes for process operators.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Caution: Delete all PPPI_NOTE characteristics to which you do notassign long texts.

Characteristics without values cause errors in control recipe creation!

Hint: The control instructions and notes are defined as standard textsin the system. You can insert these texts in the long text editor (seeSolutions).

Phase 110:PI ProcInstr

typePI Characteristic

10 INSTR PPPI_INSTRUCTION (control instruction)

Long text (ZT-DET100-1):

Long text (ZT-DET100-1): Fill the requiredquantity of raw materials T-RD1## (sulfuricacid) and T-RD2## (lauryl alcohol) into thecharging tank and confirm the filled quantity.Pay attention to the safety instructions.

PPPI_NOTE (note)


Caution! Corrosive material! Wear protectiveclothes, gloves, and protective mask.







I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y



Turn on agitator. Mix ingredients for 10 min.





Add displayed quantity of water to mixture.





Transfer material from charging tank toreaction tank. Start agitator.







I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y



Carefully add the required raw materialsT-RD4## (1 butanol) and T-RD5## (sodiumhydroxide) to the reaction vessel. Confirmconsumed quantities. Mix for 10 minutes.Pay attention to the safety instructions.

PPPI_NOTE (note)


Caution! Wear protective clothes, gloves, andprotective mask.





Transfer the contents from the reaction vesselto the cooling vessel.







I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y



Fill the product you just produced into thetransport vehicle and confirm the quantityproduced. Check if the cooling tank is emptyand close the valves.

PPPI_NOTE (note)


Wear protective clothing and gloves!

20 DE_PROD

Simulate your PI sheet.

Save your recipe.

Hint: For more information, display the process instructions thatare automatically generated in Customizing for the control recipedestination.

Double-click the control recipe destination

Task 3:In the following exercises, we want to carry out a complete process order executionbased on the master data created in the previous exercises.

1. Creating process order

Create a process order of the order type PI01 for material T-FD1## (detergent) inproduction plant 1100.

Total quantity: (for example) 10000L

Basic dates: Finish (for example) today + 1 week




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Choose Enter and pay attention to the messages in the status bar. The masterrecipe T-DET1## (detergent production) is copied along with the material listand the process order is scheduled.

On the Operation Overview and Material List screens, check whether the datafrom the master recipe T-DET1## has been copied correctly.

Check whether the quantity fields for which you have defined formulas inmaterial quantity calculation in the last chapter have been calculated correctly.

2. System-aided batch determination

Preliminary notes:

In the previous exercises, you posted batch stocks for your material componentT-RD1## which is subject to batch management requirement. The batches areclassified in the class 023_14 (Detergent production) of the class type 023"Batch". The characteristics M100 "Concentration" and M200 "Density"are assigned to class 023_14 to which you assigned the corresponding batchcharacteristics.

You also classified the BOM item T-RD1## in the BOM for material T-FD1##with the same class. For the characteristics, you defined selection conditionsfor system-aided batch determination.

Execute batch determination for component T-RD1## in the order.

Pay attention to the message on the type of batch selection. Choose Enter toconfirm the message.

Choose the batch selected.

Save your order and write down the order number. __________________.

3. System-aided resource selection

Preliminary notes:

In the previous exercises, you classified your reaction vessel in the classREAC_## "Reaction vessel" of the class type 019 "Work center class" anddefined specific properties for these resources by assigning values to thecharacteristics assigned.

The resource T-DTG1## that is assigned to operation 200 only serves planningpurposes (task list usage C## "Recipe until release, grp##"). An order cannot bereleased with this resource. Before an order can be released, the preliminary ordummy resource must be replaced with a suitable real resource.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


You also classified operation 200 with the class REAC_## and, by assigningthe corresponding values to the characteristics, defined selection conditions forsystem-aided resource selection. The resource network is taken into account.

Execute a resource selection for operation 200.

Select one of the resource proposed.

4. Releasing process order

Release your order.

5. Generating a control recipe

Create the control recipe for the order.

Save your order.

6. Sending the control recipe

Send your recipe in the control recipe monitor.

7. Finding and maintaining the PI sheet

Search for the PI sheet and maintain it.

Confirm the start and finish of the maintenance of a phase with your signature.Sign with your user and confirm with your password.

Read the texts and notes that have been created in the PI sheet.

Report the actual quantities withdrawn for raw materials T-RD1## undT-RD2##, T-RD3##, T-RD4##, and T-RD5## where applicable.

Record the produced quantity of the product T-FD1##.

Set the PI sheet to complete after the last signature.

8. Sending process messages

In the message monitor, send the process messages that were created during themaintenance of the PI sheet.

9. Checking the postings made and data updates

Check in the process order whether material movements, confirmations, andposted were posted successfully.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Task 4:Alternative 2: maintenance of the process instructions in XSteps

1. Access the master recipe with XSteps

In the Production Versions (C223) transaction, selection for the productionversions for material T-FF9##.

Access the master recipe for the production version XSDE.

2. Profile

Which instructions for process instruction maintenance are defined via the recipeprofile?

Process instruction maintenance: _________________________

3. Is it possible to maintain the control recipe destination and process instructionsfor the phases of the recipe?

______________________________________________

Where are the process instructions and control recipe destinations to bemaintained in this recipe?

______________________________________________

4. XStep Editor

Navigate to the XStep Editor of the recipe.

First, get an overview of the XSteps used for the XStep tree Fertilizer Production.

5. Simulation of the PI sheet

The process instructions in the XSteps define a PI sheet for control recipedestination FE Fertilizer.

Simulate the PI sheet.

Compare the XSteps of the XStep tree to the simulated PI sheet.

Hint: The process instructions on the material consumption and goodsreceipt cannot be generated in the simulation yet.

6. Process instructions of an XSteps

Expand the structure of the XSteps Work Instruction with Safety SafetyInstructions.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Information on the XStep:

Which application context does the XStep have?

Application context: ___________________________

To which control recipe destination is the XStep assigned?

Destination type: ________________________________

Destination: ___________________________________

Characteristics of the process instructions:

Display the characteristics of the process instruction elements <Long text> andSafety Instructions of the process instructions 'Work instructions with safetyinstructions.

The process instruction elements define long text outputs.

Display the long texts.

7. Standard XSteps

In our example, the XSteps for the process instructions were created in theXStep Editor of the recipe.

The other XSteps of the recipe are references to standard XSteps of the StandardXStep Repository.

Display the standard XSteps in the Repository (plant 1100). The XSteps used inthe recipe are in the folder Fertilizer Production EN.

Task 5:In the following exercises you can now execute the process order processing based onthe recipe for production version XSDE of material T-FF9##.


Create a process order of the order type PI01 for material T-FF9## in productionplant 1100.

Choose a total quantity of 1000l and a basic finish date in the future.

Before you confirm the entered data choose the Production Versions button andmanually select production version XSDE to open the order.

The order is immediately released based on the settings in the material masterand the control recipe for the order is generated automatically.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Save your order first.

2. Display the XSteps in the order

Display the XSteps of your order.

Note that the standard XSteps were exploded and the generation rules executed.

Simulate the PI sheet for the order.

3. You can now carry out the following activities according to the precedingexercises:

� Send the control recipe

� Edit the PI sheet

� Send process messages

� Analyze the data in the process order



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Solution 16: Maintenance of ProcessInstructionsTask 1:Alternative 1: maintenance on the process instructions for the phases

Control recipe destinations and process instructions

1. Display the operation overview for recipe 1 of the recipe group COLORS.

a) Control recipe destinations and process instructions

Logistics→ Production - Process→ Master Data→ Master Recipes→Recipe and Material List→ Display

Operations tab

2. Control recipe destinations

Which control recipe destinations have been assigned to the phases of the recipe?

Choose input help (F4) on the Destination field.

CtrRecDest Description of control recipe destination

____ __________________________________

____ __________________________________

a) Choose F4 on the Destination field.

CRD Description of control recipe destination

01 PI sheet for group 1

A1 PI sheet for group A1

3. Process instructions

Which process instruction categories are assigned to phase 1010?


Icon Process Instructions for phase 1010 process instruction type

___________________________

___________________________




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


___________________________

a) INSTR

READ2

SIGN

4. Process instruction characteristics

Which process instruction characteristics are assigned to the process instructionINSTR?


______________________________

______________________________

The characteristics PPPI_INSTRUCTION and PPPI_NOTE are each assigned along text. Display the long texts.

Choose Value.

a) PPPI_INSTRUCTION

PPPI_NOTE

5. PI sheet simulation

Simulate the PI sheet for the phases with control recipe destination 01.



a) Simulating PI sheet for control recipe destination 01:

Operations tab

Select phases with control recipe destination 01.


Task 2:Defining a PI sheet in recipe T-DET1##

1. Create process instructions for your recipe T-DET1## according to theinformation in the following table.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Check and correct the texts and remove the process instruction characteristicsyou do not need.

Hint: The process instructions required for reporting material movementand order dates as well as other process instructions with informationon operations, phases, and material components are all defined asautomatically generated process instructions for the control recipedestination DE.

In this exercise, you only have to define process instructions for workinstructions and notes for process operators.

Caution: Delete all PPPI_NOTE characteristics to which you do notassign long texts.

Characteristics without values cause errors in control recipe creation!

Hint: The control instructions and notes are defined as standard textsin the system. You can insert these texts in the long text editor (seeSolutions).





Long text (ZT-DET100-1): Fill the requiredquantity of raw materials T-RD1## (sulfuricacid) and T-RD2## (lauryl alcohol) into thecharging tank and confirm the filled quantity.Pay attention to the safety instructions.

PPPI_NOTE (note)




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y



Caution! Corrosive material! Wear protectiveclothes, gloves, and protective mask.





Turn on agitator. Mix ingredients for 10 min.





Add displayed quantity of water to mixture.







I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y



Transfer material from charging tank toreaction tank. Start agitator.





Carefully add the required raw materialsT-RD4## (1 butanol) and T-RD5## (sodiumhydroxide) to the reaction vessel. Confirmconsumed quantities. Mix for 10 minutes.Pay attention to the safety instructions.

PPPI_NOTE (note)


Caution! Wear protective clothes, gloves, andprotective mask.







I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y



Transfer the contents from the reaction vesselto the cooling vessel.





Fill the product you just produced into thetransport vehicle and confirm the quantityproduced. Check if the cooling tank is emptyand close the valves.

PPPI_NOTE (note)


Wear protective clothing and gloves!

20 DE_PROD

Simulate your PI sheet.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Save your recipe.

Hint: For more information, display the process instructions thatare automatically generated in Customizing for the control recipedestination.

Double-click the control recipe destination

a) Defining a PI sheet in recipe T-DET1##

Operations tab

Select phases listed.

Choose the Process Instructions icon.

Enter the process instruction.


Maintain control instructions or notes.

Caution: Delete all PPPI_NOTE characteristics to which you donot assign long texts. Characteristics without values cause errorsin control recipe creation!

Hint: The control instructions and notes are defined as standardtexts in the system. You can call up these texts in the long texteditor by choosing:

Insert→ Text→ Standard...

Enter text name ZT-DET100-*

Set the �Expand immediately� indicator.

To simulate your PI sheet,

select all phases in the operation overview.





I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Task 3:In the following exercises, we want to carry out a complete process order executionbased on the master data created in the previous exercises.


Create a process order of the order type PI01 for material T-FD1## (detergent) inproduction plant 1100.

Total quantity: (for example) 10000LBasic dates: Finish (for example) today + 1 week

Choose Enter and pay attention to the messages in the status bar. The masterrecipe T-DET1## (detergent production) is copied along with the material listand the process order is scheduled.

On the Operation Overview and Material List screens, check whether the datafrom the master recipe T-DET1## has been copied correctly.

Check whether the quantity fields for which you have defined formulas inmaterial quantity calculation in the last chapter have been calculated correctly.

a) Logistics→ Production - Process→ Process Order→ Process Order→ Create→ With Material

Navigation in the operation overview:

Choose Operations.

Navigation in the material list

Choose Materials.

2. System-aided batch determination

Preliminary notes:

In the previous exercises, you posted batch stocks for your material componentT-RD1## which is subject to batch management requirement. The batches areclassified in the class 023_14 (Detergent production) of the class type 023"Batch". The characteristics M100 "Concentration" and M200 "Density"are assigned to class 023_14 to which you assigned the corresponding batchcharacteristics.

You also classified the BOM item T-RD1## in the BOM for material T-FD1##with the same class. For the characteristics, you defined selection conditionsfor system-aided batch determination.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Execute batch determination for component T-RD1## in the order.

Pay attention to the message on the type of batch selection. Choose Enter toconfirm the message.

Choose the batch selected.

Save your order and write down the order number. __________________.

a) In the material list,

Choose the Execute Batch Determination icon for component T-RD1##.

For the selected batch,

Choose Copy.

3. System-aided resource selection

Preliminary notes:

In the previous exercises, you classified your reaction vessel in the classREAC_## "Reaction vessel" of the class type 019 "Work center class" anddefined specific properties for these resources by assigning values to thecharacteristics assigned.

The resource T-DTG1## that is assigned to operation 200 only serves planningpurposes (task list usage C## "Recipe until release, grp##"). An order cannot bereleased with this resource. Before an order can be released, the preliminary ordummy resource must be replaced with a suitable real resource.

You also classified operation 200 with the class REAC_## and, by assigningthe corresponding values to the characteristics, defined selection conditions forsystem-aided resource selection. The resource network is taken into account.

Execute a resource selection for operation 200.

Select one of the resource proposed.

a) (�)→ Process Order→ Change


Choose the Execute Resource Selection icon for operation 200.

Select one of the resources proposed.

4. Releasing process order

Release your order.

a) Choose the Release icon in the upper icon bar.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


5. Generating a control recipe

Create the control recipe for the order.

Save your order.

a) Choose the Generate Control Recipe icon.

6. Sending the control recipe

Send your recipe in the control recipe monitor.

a) (�)→ Process Management→ Control Recipe→ Control Recipe Monitor

7. Finding and maintaining the PI sheet

Search for the PI sheet and maintain it.

Confirm the start and finish of the maintenance of a phase with your signature.Sign with your user and confirm with your password.

Read the texts and notes that have been created in the PI sheet.

Report the actual quantities withdrawn for raw materials T-RD1## undT-RD2##, T-RD3##, T-RD4##, and T-RD5## where applicable.

Record the produced quantity of the product T-FD1##.


a) (�)→ Process Management→ PI Sheet→ Find


Choose Complete.

8. Sending process messages

In the message monitor, send the process messages that were created during themaintenance of the PI sheet.

a) (�)→ Process Management→ Message→ Message Monitor

9. Checking the postings made and data updates




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Check in the process order whether material movements, confirmations, andposted were posted successfully.

a) (�)→ Process Order→ Display

Header

� Display the Status that currently applies� Note the Delivered Quantity

Material list

� Display the Detail Data for the material components� Note the Withdrawal quantities

Operation overview

� For some phases, navigate to the detail view for Dates� Note the Confirmed Dates quantities

Goto→ Costs→ Analysis

� Get an overview of the cost updates in your order with regard toconfirmations, material withdrawals and the goods receipt.

Task 4:Alternative 2: maintenance of the process instructions in XSteps

1. Access the master recipe with XSteps

In the Production Versions (C223) transaction, selection for the productionversions for material T-FF9##.

Access the master recipe for the production version XSDE.

a) Known procedure

2. Profile

Which instructions for process instruction maintenance are defined via the recipeprofile?

Process instruction maintenance: _________________________

a) Extras→ Profile

Process instruction maintenance: XSteps




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


3. Is it possible to maintain the control recipe destination and process instructionsfor the phases of the recipe?

______________________________________________

Where are the process instructions and control recipe destinations to bemaintained in this recipe?

______________________________________________

a) The maintenance of the process instructions and control recipe destinationin XSteps has to occur in the XStep Editor of the recipe. Maintenance forthe phases is not possible.

4. XStep Editor

Navigate to the XStep Editor of the recipe.

First, get an overview of the XSteps used for the XStep tree Fertilizer Production.

a) Choose the XSteps icon.

5. Simulation of the PI sheet

The process instructions in the XSteps define a PI sheet for control recipedestination FE Fertilizer.

Simulate the PI sheet.

Compare the XSteps of the XStep tree to the simulated PI sheet.

Hint: The process instructions on the material consumption and goodsreceipt cannot be generated in the simulation yet.

a) XSteps→ Simulate

6. Process instructions of an XSteps

Expand the structure of the XSteps Work Instruction with Safety SafetyInstructions.


Which application context does the XStep have?

Application context: ___________________________

To which control recipe destination is the XStep assigned?

Destination type: ________________________________




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Destination: ___________________________________


Display the characteristics of the process instruction elements <Long text> andSafety Instructions of the process instructions 'Work instructions with safetyinstructions.

The process instruction elements define long text outputs.

Display the long texts.

a) The structure of the XStep can be expanded using the correspondingfunction of the context menu (right mouse button).


Double-click XStep

General tab

Application context: Phase 0110

Destination type: PI sheet

Destination: fertilizer


You get to the characteristics of the process instructions element via thecontext menu.

You then get to the long text editor via the corresponding pushbutton.

7. Standard XSteps

In our example, the XSteps for the process instructions were created in theXStep Editor of the recipe.

The other XSteps of the recipe are references to standard XSteps of the StandardXStep Repository.

Display the standard XSteps in the Repository (plant 1100). The XSteps used inthe recipe are in the folder Fertilizer Production EN.

a) (�) → Production � Process→ Master Data→ Standard XStepRepository




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Task 5:In the following exercises you can now execute the process order processing based onthe recipe for production version XSDE of material T-FF9##.


Create a process order of the order type PI01 for material T-FF9## in productionplant 1100.

Choose a total quantity of 1000l and a basic finish date in the future.

Before you confirm the entered data choose the Production Versions button andmanually select production version XSDE to open the order.

The order is immediately released based on the settings in the material masterand the control recipe for the order is generated automatically.

Save your order first.

a) See exercise description

2. Display the XSteps in the order

Display the XSteps of your order.

Note that the standard XSteps were exploded and the generation rules executed.

Simulate the PI sheet for the order.

a) (�)→ Process Order→ Display

Choose XSteps.

XSteps→ Simulate

3. You can now carry out the following activities according to the precedingexercises:

� Send the control recipe

� Edit the PI sheet

� Send process messages

� Analyze the data in the process order

a) Known procedure



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Maintain control recipe destinations and process instructions in the master recipe� Design a simple PI sheet in the master recipe



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Lesson: Reporting, Mass Processing and Copying

Lesson: Reporting, Mass Processing and Copying

Lesson OverviewIn this lesson you will learn about

� Reporting and mass processing functions for master recipes and BOMs� Cross-plant copying of master recipes.


� Use reporting and mass processing functions for master recipes and BOMs� Copy master recipes across plants

Business ExampleYou get an overview of the reporting and further functions available for master recipes.

Reporting and Mass Processing

Figure 114: Reporting and Mass Processing



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Copying Recipes from Other Plants

Figure 115: Copying Recipes from Other Plants

When creating a master recipe by copying, you can also use a recipe, routing, orinspection plan belonging to a different plant as a template.

For the following objects, the reference to the original plant also remains in the newrecipe:

Header material of the recipe and factory calendar of relationships.

The following objects are copied to the new recipe with reference to the target plant.

Primary resource, control recipe destination and process instructions. These objectsmust already exist in the target plant. Otherwise, copying is terminated.

As of Release 4.6C, the system only issues a warning when a resource of the originalrecipe does not exist in the plant of the copied recipe. The relevant operation of therecipe is then copied without the resource.

The data on the recipe object detail screens are checked. You must change the dataif an entry does not exist in the target plant or does not comply with the resourcedata in the target plant.

The system does not check whether the master inspection characteristics in the targetplant are identical to those used in the template and whether the characteristics of thecopied process instructions have also been released for use in process instructionsin the target plant.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


The system does not copy production versions, material quantity calculations, andrelationships to other recipes.

It copies the component assignments to operations and phases maintained in thetemplate. To be able to use them in the new recipe, however, you must createproduction versions to assign the alternative BOMs of the template to the new recipe.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Exercise 17: Reporting, Mass Processingand Copying

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Use reporting and mass processing functions for master recipes and BOMs

Business ExampleFinally, you get an overview of the reporting and further functions available formaster recipes.

Task:Reporting and mass changes of master recipes

1. a) Recipe list

Create a print list for the master recipe T-ICE##.

(�)→ Master Recipes→ Reporting→ Recipe→ Recipe List

Task list type: 2Recipe group: T-ICE##

You want component assignments displayed in the list.

Program→ Execute

b) Familiarize yourself with the further reporting functions that are availablefor production versions, master recipes and BOMs.

(�)→ Master Recipes→ Reporting < ...>

c) Familiarize yourself with the mass changes that are possible for master data.

(...) → Master Recipes→ Mass Changes→ < ...>



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Solution 17: Reporting, Mass Processingand CopyingTask:Reporting and mass changes of master recipes

1. a) Recipe list

Create a print list for the master recipe T-ICE##.

(�)→ Master Recipes→ Reporting→ Recipe→ Recipe List

Task list type: 2Recipe group: T-ICE##

You want component assignments displayed in the list.

Program→ Execute

b) Familiarize yourself with the further reporting functions that are availablefor production versions, master recipes and BOMs.

(�)→ Master Recipes→ Reporting < ...>

c) Familiarize yourself with the mass changes that are possible for master data.

(...) → Master Recipes→ Mass Changes→ < ...>

a) Solution a to c:

<...>→ Mass changes→ <...>

<...>→ Reporting→ <...>

→ Production Versions

→ Recipe

→ Recipe list→ Recipe Changes→ Change Documents

→ Material List→ <....>

→ Where-Used List→ <....>



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Use reporting and mass processing functions for master recipes and BOMs� Copy master recipes across plants



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit Summary PLM115

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:� Describe the principle of process management� Maintain control recipe destinations and process instructions in the master recipe� Design a simple PI sheet in the master recipe� Use reporting and mass processing functions for master recipes and BOMs� Copy master recipes across plants



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Test Your Knowledge

1. Which functions does process management comprise?

2. Which alternatives are available for process instructions maintenance?? Try todescribe the alternatives in key words.

3. Name some reporting and mass processing functions for master recipes andBOMs.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Answers

1. Which functions does process management comprise?

Answer:

� Generation and sending of control recipes� Automated processing: transferring the control recipes to the process

control system� Manual processing: Formatting the control recipes in natural language

as PI sheets� Receiving and processing process messages with actual process data from

the process control system or the PI sheet

2. Which alternatives are available for process instructions maintenance?? Try todescribe the alternatives in key words.

Answer:

� Alternative 1 (All Releases)

� Presetting the process instruction types in Customizing� Maintenance of the process instructions based on copied process

instructions for the phases of the recipe/process order� Assigning the control recipe destinations to the phases� Definition of process instructions to be generated for the control

recipe destinations in Customizing.� Alternative 2 (as of SAP R/3 ERP and SCM Extension 2.00)

� Maintenance of all process instructions in XSteps (Execution Steps)in the XStep Editor of the recipe/process order

� Option of copy of reference of standard XSteps from the StandardXStep Repository

� Assigning the control recipe destination and maintenance of thegeneration scope, context and parameters for the XSteps



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


3. Name some reporting and mass processing functions for master recipes andBOMs.

Answer:

� Recipe List:

Print list for master recipes

� Recipe Changes:

Change documentation for recipe objects

� Where-Used list:

� Use in master recipes:

Resources, process instructions

� Used in BOMs:

Material, document, class

� Mass Changes:

� Recipe: Replace Resources / Process Instructions� BOM: Replace Material

� Change documents:

� for master recipes� for BOMs

� BOM explosion� BOM comparison



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit Summary PLM115



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit 10Aspects of the Manufacture of

Co-Products

Unit OverviewThis chapter introduces you to the settings in the material master and BOM for themanufacture of co-products.


� Describe the principle of the manufacture of co-products� Maintain material masters and BOMs for the manufacture of co-products� Create apportionment structures for the cost apportionment when manufacturing

co-products� Create a process order for a co-product

Unit ContentsLesson: Manufacture of Co-Products - Overview ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364Lesson: Maintaining Material and BOM.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367

Exercise 18: Maintaining Material and BOM... .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit 10: Aspects of the Manufacture of Co-Products PLM115

Lesson: Manufacture of Co-Products - Overview

Lesson OverviewThis lesson familiarizes you with the principle of the manufacture of co-products.


� Describe the principle of the manufacture of co-products

Business ExampleThere are production processes in your enterprise in which a number of differentmaterials are produced at the same time. You want to use the manufacture ofco-products to represent these processes.

Manufacture of Co-Products

Figure 116: Manufacture of Co-Products

The production of several materials that are to be treated as equals in the order, asfar as cost calculation and goods receipt are concerned, is called manufacture ofco-products.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Lesson: Manufacture of Co-Products - Overview

In the settlement rule of the order, all co-products involved are defined assettlement receivers. The order costs incurred are distributed to the co-productsaccording to an apportionment structure.

Each co-product has its own goods receipt data in the order. Goods receipts takeplace with movement type 101 Goods receipt for order .

Goods receipts for by-products take place with movement type 531 Goods receipt forby-product. Order costs and order settlement do not affect by-products.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Describe the principle of the manufacture of co-products



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Lesson: Maintaining Material and BOM

Lesson: Maintaining Material and BOM

Lesson OverviewThis lesson familiarizes you with the settings in the material master and BOM forthe manufacture of co-products.


� Maintain material masters and BOMs for the manufacture of co-products� Create apportionment structures for the cost apportionment when manufacturing


Business ExampleYour enterprise also produces fertilizer.

During the production process, the material "sulphuric acid" is produced along withthe main product. Sulphuric acid is to be considered an equal "co-product".

To map the manufacture of co-products onto the system, you must adjust the existingBOM for fertilizer production.

You must also make the corresponding changes to the material masters of theco-products.

In particular, you must define an apportionment structure for cost apportionment inthe process order.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Material Master

Figure 117: Material Master

The Co-product indicator must be set in the material master of a material that is to bemanufactured as a co-product.

When manufacturing co-products, the entire costs incurred for the process order arecollected at order header level and distributed to the individual co-products usingequivalence numbers.

In the material master record, you define one or more apportionment structures.An apportionment structure specifies how the order costs are to be distributed tothe co-products manufactured in a specific production process. You can maintainequivalence numbers for each apportionment structure and assign the apportionmentstructure to a production version.

When you create a process order, the system uses this data to automatically generate asettlement rule. This settlement rule is then used to distribute the total costs incurredto the co-products.

A source structure is used to distribute the equivalences in the apportionmentstructure according to cost element groups. How the costs are apportioned to theindividual co-products can then differ according to the various cost element groupsinvolved. You define source structures in Customizing.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


BOM

Figure 118: BOM

To map the manufacture of co-products onto the system, you assign a co-product asthe leading material to the BOM header. All other co-products appear as BOM items.

The following prerequisites must be met for the manufacture of co-products:

The Co-product indicator must be set in the material master of the co-products.

The Co-product indicator must also be set for BOM items to which co-products havebeen assigned.

The manufacture of co-products can also be mappped onto the system by using thematerial type PROC Process material. A process material is specifically used torepresent the manufacture of co-products. A process material is not a physicallyexisting material but rather it represents a manufacturing process.

If you use a process material as the BOM header, all co-products of the productionprocess are defined as BOM items with the Co-product indicator.

There is no quantity or value update for a process material. This takes place atco-product level.

A process order can either be created for a co-product or for a process material.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Exercise 18: Maintaining Material and BOM

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Maintain material masters and BOMs for the manufacture of co-products� Create apportionment structures for the cost apportionment when manufacturing


Business ExampleYour enterprise also produces fertilizer.

During the production process, the material "sulfuric acid" is produced along with themain product. Sulphuric acid is to be considered an equal "co-product".

To map the manufacture of co-products onto the system, you must adjust the existingBOM for fertilizer production.

In particular, you must define an apportionment structure for cost apportionment inthe process order.

Task 1:Overview of master recipe T-RC1##

1. Familiarize yourself with the data in master recipe 1 of the recipe group T-RC1##Recipe group for fertilizer production.


Familiarize yourself with the operations, phases and resources assigned.



Which material is assigned to the recipe as a product?

________________________

4. Material list

Familiarize yourself with the material components that are assigned to the recipe.

Which materials are assigned?




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


________________________

________________________

________________________

Task 2:Material master: Co-Product indicator

1. Set the Co-Product indicator for your materials T-FF1## Fertilizer and T-FF3##Sulfuric acid in the material master or check whether the indicator has been set.

View: MRP 2

Plant: 1100

Task 3:BOM

1. Enter the material T-FF3## in the master recipe T-RC1## as a co-product in theBOM of the �leading� product T-FF1##.

Maintain the following new BOM item:

Item ICt Component Quantity Un0040 L T-FF3## 7- L

Set the Co-Product indicator for the new BOM item T-FF3##.

Adjust the base quantity in the BOM header.

In the material list, assign the co-product T-FF3## to phase 330.

Save your recipe.

Task 4:Material master: apportionment structure

1. In the material master record for the leading product T-FF1##, create anapportionment structure for distributing the process order costs to the co-productsT-FF1## and T-FF3## for the fertilizer production process.

View: MRP 2

Plant: 1100




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Choose Joint production

The Cost Apportionment to Co-Products: Apportionment Structures screenappears.

Enter a number and a description for the apportionment structure.

In addition, assign the source structure PI so you can directly distribute theproduction costs to different cost element groups.

Apportionment structureNo. Description Structure0001 T-FF1## & T-FF3## PI

You can now enter equivalence numbers to define how you want to distribute theorder costs to the co-products.

Choose Equivalence Numbers

Since you assigned a source structure, you can distribute the costs to cost elementgroups. You can enter a cost element group defined in the source structure inthe Assignments field.

Maintain the following equivalence numbers:

Assignment Co-product EqNo1 "Material costs" T-FF1## 101 "Material costs" T-FF3## 12 "Production costs" T-FF1## 52 "Production costs" T-FF3## 33 "Other costs" T-FF1## 23 "Other costs" T-FF3## 1


Task 5:Material master: assigning an apportionment structure to a production version

1. In the material master record for the product T-FF1##, assign your apportionmentstructure 0001 to production version 0001.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


View: MRP 4

Plant: 1100

Choose ProdVersions

Choose Details

Apportionment structure: 0001

Task 6:Optional exercises:

1. Source structure in Customizing

In Customizing, display the source structure PI with which the production costsare directly distributed to the different cost element groups.

Write down the following:

Assignment Cost element groupMaterial costsProduction costsOther costs

Cost element groups in Controlling

In Controlling, display the above cost element groups and list three cost elementsfor each cost element group:

Cost element group: Cost element:




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Task 7:Creating process orders for the co-products

1. Create a process order (order type PI01) for the leading product T-FF1## inproduction plant 1100.

Total quantity: (for example) 1000 LBasic dates: Finish (for example) today + 1 week

On the Operation Overview and the Material List screens, check whether thedata from your master recipe has been copied correctly.

Note the two order items for the co-products in the material list.

In addition, check in the settlement rule whether your apportionment structurefor the co-products was adopted.

2. Create a process order (order type PI01) for the co-product T-FF3##.


In the order header, the co-product T-FF3## is replaced by the leading BOMmaterial T-FF1##.

The quantity to be produced for the leading BOM material T-FF1 is calculatedfrom the quantity desired for your co-product T-FF3##.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Solution 18: Maintaining Material and BOMTask 1:Overview of master recipe T-RC1##

1. Familiarize yourself with the data in master recipe 1 of the recipe group T-RC1##Recipe group for fertilizer production.

a) (�)→ Master Data→ Production Versions

Plant: 1100

Group Counter: T-RC1##

Select the production version

Choose Recipe


Familiarize yourself with the operations, phases and resources assigned.

a) Operation overview




________________________

a) Recipe header data

Recipe header tab


Choose Material Assignments

T-FF1##, Fertilizer, fluid, form A

4. Material list

Familiarize yourself with the material components that are assigned to the recipe.


________________________

________________________




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


________________________

a) Recipes tab

Materials icon


T-RF1##

T-RF3##

T-RF2##

Task 2:Material master: Co-Product indicator

1. Set the Co-Product indicator for your materials T-FF1## Fertilizer and T-FF3##Sulfuric acid in the material master or check whether the indicator has been set.

View: MRP 2

Plant: 1100

a) (�)→ Master Data→ Material Master→ Material→ Change→Immediately

View: MRP 2

Plant: 1100

X Co-product

Task 3:BOM

1. Enter the material T-FF3## in the master recipe T-RC1## as a co-product in theBOM of the �leading� product T-FF1##.

Maintain the following new BOM item:



Adjust the base quantity in the BOM header.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


In the material list, assign the co-product T-FF3## to phase 330.

Save your recipe.

a) (�)→ Master Data→ Production Versions

Plant: 1100

Group Counter: T-RC1##

Choose Recipe

Materials tab

Choose BOM.



Choose the Item icon for item T-FF3##.

X Co-product

Change the base quantity in the BOM header to 1000 L.

Choose the Header icon

Base quantity: 1000 L

Then assign the co-product T-FF3## to phase 330 in the material list.

Choose Back (F3)

The Materials tab for your recipe appears.

Choose the Create assignment icon for component T-FF3##.

Task 4:Material master: apportionment structure

1. In the material master record for the leading product T-FF1##, create anapportionment structure for distributing the process order costs to the co-productsT-FF1## and T-FF3## for the fertilizer production process.

View: MRP 2

Plant: 1100




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y




Enter a number and a description for the apportionment structure.

In addition, assign the source structure PI so you can directly distribute theproduction costs to different cost element groups.

Apportionment structureNo. Description Structure0001 T-FF1## & T-FF3## PI

You can now enter equivalence numbers to define how you want to distribute theorder costs to the co-products.

Choose Equivalence Numbers

Since you assigned a source structure, you can distribute the costs to cost elementgroups. You can enter a cost element group defined in the source structure inthe Assignments field.

Maintain the following equivalence numbers:

Assignment Co-product EqNo1 "Material costs" T-FF1## 101 "Material costs" T-FF3## 12 "Production costs" T-FF1## 52 "Production costs" T-FF3## 33 "Other costs" T-FF1## 23 "Other costs" T-FF3## 1




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y




Material: T-FF1##

View: MRP 2

Plant: 1100



See exercise

Task 5:Material master: assigning an apportionment structure to a production version

1. In the material master record for the product T-FF1##, assign your apportionmentstructure 0001 to production version 0001.

View: MRP 4

Plant: 1100

Choose ProdVersions

Choose Details



View: MRP 4

Plant: 1100

Choose ProdVersions

Choose Details





I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Task 6:Optional exercises:

1. Source structure in Customizing

In Customizing, display the source structure PI with which the production costsare directly distributed to the different cost element groups.

Write down the following:

Assignment Cost element groupMaterial costsProduction costsOther costs


In Controlling, display the above cost element groups and list three cost elementsfor each cost element group:





I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y



a) Customizing: → Controlling→ Product Cost Controlling→ Product CostPlanning→ Selected Functions in Material Costing→ Costing in JointProduction→ Define Source Structure

Select source structure PI.

Double-click the Assignments folder.

Double-click the Source folder for each assignment.

(Controlling area 1000)

Assignment Cost element groupMaterial costs CO � PC � MATProduction costs CO � PC � PRODOther costs CO � PC � MISC


SAP Easy Access menu→ Accounting→ Controlling→ Cost ElementAccounting→ Master Data→ Cost Element Group→ Display

Cost element group: Cost element:400000 Raw material404000 Replacement parts

CO � PC � MAT

405000 Packaging620000 Machine costs629600 Staging

CO � PC � PROD

625000 Setup655300 OH management655400 OH sales

CO � PC � MISC

416200 Electricity consumption




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Task 7:Creating process orders for the co-products

1. Create a process order (order type PI01) for the leading product T-FF1## inproduction plant 1100.


On the Operation Overview and the Material List screens, check whether thedata from your master recipe has been copied correctly.

Note the two order items for the co-products in the material list.

In addition, check in the settlement rule whether your apportionment structurefor the co-products was adopted.

a) (�)→ Logistics→ Production - Process→ Process Order→ ProcessOrder→ Create→ With Material

2. Create a process order (order type PI01) for the co-product T-FF3##.


In the order header, the co-product T-FF3## is replaced by the leading BOMmaterial T-FF1##.

The quantity to be produced for the leading BOM material T-FF1 is calculatedfrom the quantity desired for your co-product T-FF3##.

a) In the order header:

Header→ Settlement Rule



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Maintain material masters and BOMs for the manufacture of co-products� Create apportionment structures for the cost apportionment when manufacturing




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Unit Summary

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:� Describe the principle of the manufacture of co-products� Maintain material masters and BOMs for the manufacture of co-products� Create apportionment structures for the cost apportionment when manufacturing




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit Summary PLM115



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Test Your Knowledge

1. Which movement type is used for goods receipts for the manufacture ofco-products, and which is used for by-products?

2. Which prerequisites for the manufacture of co-products have to be taken intoaccount in the master data maintenance for material and BOM?



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Answers

1. Which movement type is used for goods receipts for the manufacture ofco-products, and which is used for by-products?

Answer:

� Co-products: movement type 101 Goods receipt for order� By-products: movement type 531 Goods receipt for by-product

2. Which prerequisites for the manufacture of co-products have to be taken intoaccount in the master data maintenance for material and BOM?

Answer:

� The Co-product indicator must be set in the material master of theco-products.

� The Co-product indicator must also be set for BOM items to whichco-products have been assigned.

� You define an apportionment structure in the material master for the costapportionment for the manufacture of co-products.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit 11Aspects of Quality Inspection During

Production

Unit OverviewThis chapter introduces you to the fundamental maintenance activities in the materialmaster and master recipe for quality inspections during production.


� Describe the integration with quality management� Maintain the material master and master recipe with regard to in-process quality

inspection

Unit ContentsLesson: Integration with Quality Management .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390Lesson: In-Process Quality Inspection... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394

Exercise 19: In-Process Quality Inspection .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit 11: Aspects of Quality Inspection During Production PLM115

Lesson: Integration with Quality Management

Lesson OverviewThis lesson familiarizes you with the integration of quality management and the term'inspection lot'.


� Describe the integration with quality management

Business ExampleYou need to check the quality of your products in parallel to process order processingfor part of your production.

Integration with Quality Management

Figure 119: Integration with Quality Management



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Lesson: Integration with Quality Management

Between the production plant and the laboratory or the quality assurance system,information on product quality and analysis values can be exchanged. This happenswhen the ECC Quality Management System is used, with or without linking toexternal LIMS (laboratory information systems).

You define the specifications of a quality inspection in the inspection characteristicsof an inspection lot in ECC QM. During inspection results recording, the results ofthe quality inspection are assigned to the inspection characteristics of the inspectionlot.

There is a direct link between ECC Process Manufacturing and ECC QualityManagement. The quality of materials produced can be checked in an in-processinspection taking place in parallel to the production process. In this case, theinspection lot is created with reference to the corresponding process order. Theinspection characteristics are created in the operations and phases of themaster recipethe process order is based on and are then transferred to the inspection lot. Inspectionresults recording takes place when the process order is carried out. If the product isto be handled in batches, inspection results can be used for batch specification byautomatically copying them to the class characteristics of the batch produced.

You can also check the product quality before a goods receipt after production. In thiscase, an inspection lot is created from an inspection plan maintained in ECC QM.

ECC QM can be linked to an LIMS using the QM-IDI interface. In this case,inspection specifications are transferred from ECC QM to the LIMS, which in turnsends the inspection results back to ECC QM.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Inspection Lot

Figure 120: Inspection Lot

The functions of quality inspection of the SAP ECC System are fully integratedwith the entire logistics process. They affect all business activities (such as productplanning, production, procurement and sales).

A quality inspection can only be carried out if an inspection lot is created. Inspectionlots are fully integrated in the supply chain, such as the neighboring ECC tasks ofgoods receipt, goods issue and process order. They document the entire inspectionprocess, from inspection specifications to inspection results recording, and to theusage decision. They can be created automatically or manually from different sourcesof the corresponding application.

In-process inspection takes place parallel to the production process. The inspectionlot is either created manually or automatically from within the process order whenthe order is released. The inspection characteristics are maintained for the operationsor phases of the master recipe on which the process order is based. They are thentransferred to the inspection lot. The inspection results are recorded for the inspectioncharacteristics of the inspection lot while the process order is carried out.

In other applications, such as a goods receipt, the inspection lot is created on thebasis of an inspection plan maintained in ECC QM. Inspection plans are master dataof ECC QM.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Lesson: Integration with Quality Management

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Describe the integration with quality management



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson: In-Process Quality Inspection

Lesson OverviewThis lesson familiarizes you with the data maintenance for representing an in-processquality inspection.


� Maintain the material master and master recipe with regard to in-process qualityinspection


You want to update the relevant batch master records with some of the inspectionresults.

You make the necessary settings in the materials and master recipes affected.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Lesson: In-Process Quality Inspection

In-Process Inspection: Inspection Lot

Figure 121: In-Process Inspection: Inspection Lot

In an in-process quality inspection, the inspection lot is created on the basis of theunderlying master recipe. In themaster recipe, you maintain inspection specificationsin the form of inspection characteristics for the corresponding operations or phases.You must define further QM data at the recipe's header level and operation or phaselevel.

You can either create the inspection lotmanually or the system creates it automaticallywhen you release the process order. For the system to be able to do so, you mustactivate the inspection type Inspection during production in the material master ofthe material to be checked. The inspection characteristics for the operations or phasesof the master recipe are then transferred to the corresponding inspection operations ofthe inspection lot.

Later, you can also add unplanned inspection characteristics from within theprocess order.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Inspection Points, Partial Lots, and Batches

Figure 122: Inspection Points, Partial Lots, and Batches

The graphic shows the general relationship between inspection points, partial lotsand batches.

If you set the Inspection points indicator on the QM Data recipe header detailscreen, all in-process inspection results recordings are carried out with relation toinspection points. Unlike inspection without inspection points, you can recordinspection results for the inspection characteristics of the same inspection operationseveral times. The intervals between the inspection points can be time-related (that is,at certain points in time), quantity-related (that is, after a certain quantity has beenproduced), or freely defined.

Inspection results recording is performed for the inspection characteristics of theinspection lot with exactly one inspection lot being created for each process order.If partial quantities with different specifications are produced in a process order,you can assign inspection points to a corresponding partial lot to record inspectionresults. You can create several partial lots.

Partial lots describe a certain production quantity during production. This quantityis processed in several operations or phases. For each operation or phase, you canperform an inspection with inspection points for different inspection characteristicsand assign the results to the partial lot. A new partial lot is created when the firstinspection point of this partial lot is processed.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


An example where partial lots are used is the manufacture of co-products, thatis, the production of several materials in one process order. Each co-product canbe represented by a partial lot.

If the finished product is managed in batches, you can assign partial lots toindividual batches. Selected inspection results can automatically be copied to theclass characteristics of the batch for batch specification.

Specification of Batches Produced

Figure 123: Specification of Batches Produced

In an in-process inspection, inspection specifications are defined using inspectioncharacteristics for the operations and phases of the master recipe, on which the processorder or inspection lot are based. You can either create inspection characteristics inthe master recipe or refer to already existingmaster inspection characteristics.

Master inspection characteristics are master data maintained in ECC QM. Theyfacilitate the maintenance of routine inspections and enable a linking to theclass characteristics of batches. Due to this link, quality inspection results canautomatically be copied from the inspection characteristics to the corresponding classcharacteristics of the batch produced.

If you choose inspection with inspection points, inspection points are assigned to acorresponding partial lot to record inspection results. You can assign several partiallots to an inspection lot. A partial lot describes a discrete production quantity that can



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


be assigned to a batch. Once a usage decision for this inspection point has beenmade, the inspection results of an inspection point are transferred to the classcharacteristics of the batch linked to the master inspection characteristics.

If you want to carry out an inspection without inspection points, inspection resultsare recorded for the entire inspection lot. You can assign the production quantity toa batch. Once a usage decision for the entire inspection lot has been made, theinspection results are transferred to the class characteristics of the batch linkedto the master inspection characteristics.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Exercise 19: In-Process Quality Inspection

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Maintain the material master and master recipe with regard to in-process quality

inspection


You want to update the relevant batch master records with some of the inspectionresults.

You make the necessary settings in the materials and master recipes affected.

Task 1:Material master: inspection type In-process inspection of production order

1. You must activate the inspection type In-process inspection of production orderin the material master so that an in-process quality inspection can be carried outfor process orders for the production of your material T-HTB2## Cetepharm-Ntablet. First, check whether this setting has been made.

Quality Management view

Plant: 1100

Choose Insp. setup

Inspection type: ___________________________________

Activation indicator set?: yes/no

Task 2:Master inspection characteristics

1. During the tablet production, the water contents and active ingredient contents areto be inspected during the production process. Master inspection characteristicshave been created for this in master data maintenance of Quality Management.

Display the following master inspection characteristics for plant 1100. What arethe descriptions for each characteristic?




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Logistics→ Quality Management→ Quality Planning→ Basic Data→Inspection Characteristic→ Display

Master insp. charac. DescriptionN-200N-300

The batch we will produce is to be specified according to the inspection resultsfor the active ingredient content. To which class or batch characteristic does thedata for master inspection characteristic N-300 refer?

Master insp. charac. Class char.N-300

Task 3:Master Recipe

1. To describe the production of product T-HTB2## Cetepharm N tablet, productionversion 0001 was created with reference to recipe 1 of recipe group T-TAB##.

2. Control key

To which phase is control key PI02 assigned in the operation overview?

Phase number: ___________________

Which indicator is set for control key PI02 with regard to a quality inspection?

_________________________________

3. Inspection characteristics assigned

Which inspection characteristics are to be checked for phase 0320?

Choose the Inspection characteristic icon for phase 0320.

Master insp. charac. Description

4. Process instruction QMJUMPPH

In the process instruction overview, navigate to phase 0320.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


The process instruction QMJUMPPH Jump to QM results recording, phase oftype 5 Inspection results request enables you to directly navigate to the rightinspection results view of the inspection lot currently assigned to the processorder from a PI sheet.

Task 4:Inspection results recording for phase 0320

In the following exercise, you will perform an in-process quality inspection from a PIsheet (based on the master data shown in the previous exercises).

1. Creating a process order for material T-HTB2##

Create a process order of the process order type PI04 for the materialT-HTB2### in plant 1100.

Total quantity: 100 000 piecesBasic dates: Start (for example) today + 1 week

The master recipe T-TAB## is copied along with the material list.

In the operation overview and in the material list, check whether the data inmaster recipe T-TAB## has been copied correctly.

Save your order and write down the process order number.

Process order number: _________________________

2. Release the process order and generate the control recipes

Release your order.

Note that when you release the order, an inspection lot is automatically createdwith reference to the order (see Assignment tab in the order header).

In addition, a batch number is assigned for your product T-HTB2## (see Goodsreceipt tab in the order header). Write down the batch number.

Batch number: _________________________

Create the control recipes for the order.

Then save your order.

3. Sending the control recipe and maintaining the PI sheet

Select the control recipes for your process order in the control recipe monitor.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Send the control recipe for control recipe destination QM.

Search for the corresponding PI sheet and maintain it.

Enter your signature for phase 310 to confirm the start of PI sheet maintenanceand the preparation of the QM inspection. Use your user to sign and thepassword to confirm the signature.

Enter another signature for phase 320 to confirm that you have identified thephysical sample.

4. Recording inspection results

Choose the Insp.results recording button in phase 0320.

Enter any number to identify your inspection point and confirm by choosingEnter.

On the Record Results: Characteristic Overview, enter the inspection resultsin the Result column for the inspection characteristics Water content and activeingredient content (for example, Water content: 1.5 %, Active ingredientcontent: 98 %).

Choose Enter to confirm your entries and save.

The system takes you back to the PI sheet.

If there is enough time, maintain the remaining steps in the PI sheet.

Then exit your PI sheet.

5. Displaying a batch with inspection results

Display the order batch for material T-HTB2##.

Go to the classification data for the batch.

Check whether the value you entered for the active ingredient content ininspection results recording was copied to the batch master record.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Solution 19: In-Process Quality InspectionTask 1:Material master: inspection type In-process inspection of production order

1. You must activate the inspection type In-process inspection of production orderin the material master so that an in-process quality inspection can be carried outfor process orders for the production of your material T-HTB2## Cetepharm-Ntablet. First, check whether this setting has been made.


Plant: 1100

Choose Insp. setup

Inspection type: ___________________________________

Activation indicator set?: yes/no

a) Material master: inspection type In-process inspection of productionorder

(�)→ Material Master→ Material→ Display→ Display Current

Material: T-HTB2##


Plant: 1100

Choose Insp. setup

Inspection type: 03 = In-process insp. for production order

Activation indicator set: yes

Task 2:Master inspection characteristics

1. During the tablet production, the water contents and active ingredient contents areto be inspected during the production process. Master inspection characteristicshave been created for this in master data maintenance of Quality Management.

Display the following master inspection characteristics for plant 1100. What arethe descriptions for each characteristic?




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Logistics→ Quality Management→ Quality Planning→ Basic Data→Inspection Characteristic→ Display

Master insp. charac. DescriptionN-200N-300

The batch we will produce is to be specified according to the inspection resultsfor the active ingredient content. To which class or batch characteristic does thedata for master inspection characteristic N-300 refer?

Master insp. charac. Class char.N-300

a) Logistics→ Quality Management→ Quality Planning→ Basic Data→Inspection Characteristic→ Display

Master insp. charac. DescriptionN-200 Water contentN-300 Active ingredient content

Master insp. charac. Class char.N-300 N-006

Task 3:Master Recipe

1. To describe the production of product T-HTB2## Cetepharm N tablet, productionversion 0001 was created with reference to recipe 1 of recipe group T-TAB##.

a) (�)→ Production Versions

Selecting the production version for recipe T-HTB2##

Choose Recipe (for the selected production version)

2. Control key

To which phase is control key PI02 assigned in the operation overview?




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Phase number: ___________________

Which indicator is set for control key PI02 with regard to a quality inspection?

_________________________________

a) Phase number: 0320

Control key: PI02

F4 for control key PI02

Choose Detail info for control key PI02

Insp.char. required indicator

3. Inspection characteristics assigned

Which inspection characteristics are to be checked for phase 0320?

Choose the Inspection characteristic icon for phase 0320.

Master insp. charac. Description

a) Choose the Inspection characteristic icon for phase 0320.

Master insp. charac. DescriptionN-200 Water contentN-300 Active ingredient content

4. Process instruction QMJUMPPH

In the process instruction overview, navigate to phase 0320.

The process instruction QMJUMPPH Jump to QM results recording, phase oftype 5 Inspection results request enables you to directly navigate to the rightinspection results view of the inspection lot currently assigned to the processorder from a PI sheet.

a) Process instruction QMJUMPPH




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Task 4:Inspection results recording for phase 0320

In the following exercise, you will perform an in-process quality inspection from a PIsheet (based on the master data shown in the previous exercises).

1. Creating a process order for material T-HTB2##

Create a process order of the process order type PI04 for the materialT-HTB2### in plant 1100.

Total quantity: 100 000 piecesBasic dates: Start (for example) today + 1 week

The master recipe T-TAB## is copied along with the material list.

In the operation overview and in the material list, check whether the data inmaster recipe T-TAB## has been copied correctly.

Save your order and write down the process order number.

Process order number: _________________________

a) Logistics→ Production - Process→ Process Order→ Process Order→ Create→ With Material

2. Release the process order and generate the control recipes

Release your order.

Note that when you release the order, an inspection lot is automatically createdwith reference to the order (see Assignment tab in the order header).

In addition, a batch number is assigned for your product T-HTB2## (see Goodsreceipt tab in the order header). Write down the batch number.

Batch number: _________________________

Create the control recipes for the order.

Then save your order.

a) (�)→ Process Order→ Change

Choose the Release icon

Choose the Generate control recipe icon

3. Sending the control recipe and maintaining the PI sheet




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Select the control recipes for your process order in the control recipe monitor.

Send the control recipe for control recipe destination QM.

Search for the corresponding PI sheet and maintain it.

Enter your signature for phase 310 to confirm the start of PI sheet maintenanceand the preparation of the QM inspection. Use your user to sign and thepassword to confirm the signature.

Enter another signature for phase 320 to confirm that you have identified thephysical sample.

a) (�)→ Process Management→ Control Recipe→ Control Recipe Monitor

(�)→ Process Management→ PI Sheet→ Find

4. Recording inspection results

Choose the Insp.results recording button in phase 0320.

Enter any number to identify your inspection point and confirm by choosingEnter.

On the Record Results: Characteristic Overview, enter the inspection resultsin the Result column for the inspection characteristics Water content and activeingredient content (for example, Water content: 1.5 %, Active ingredientcontent: 98 %).

Choose Enter to confirm your entries and save.

The system takes you back to the PI sheet.

If there is enough time, maintain the remaining steps in the PI sheet.

Then exit your PI sheet.

a) Recording inspection results

5. Displaying a batch with inspection results

Display the order batch for material T-HTB2##.

Go to the classification data for the batch.

Check whether the value you entered for the active ingredient content ininspection results recording was copied to the batch master record.

a) (�)→ Material Master→ Batch→ Display

Classification tab



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Maintain the material master and master recipe with regard to in-process quality

inspection



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Unit Summary

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:� Describe the integration with quality management� Maintain the material master and master recipe with regard to in-process quality

inspection



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit Summary PLM115



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Test Your Knowledge

1. How and where are the inspection specifications defined in an in-process qualityinspection?



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Answers

1. How and where are the inspection specifications defined in an in-process qualityinspection?

Answer: The inspection specifications are defined using inspectioncharacteristics for the operations and phases of the master recipe, on which theprocess order or inspection lot are based.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit 12Engineering Change Management,

Recipe Approval

Unit OverviewThis chapter introduces you to fundamental aspects of engineering changemanagement and to mapping the approval procedure for master recipes.


� Describe the principle of using the engineering change management� Make changes using change master records� Create and process engineering change requests / engineering change orders� Carry out an approval procedure for master recipes

Unit ContentsLesson: Engineering Change Management - Overview ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414Lesson: Changes with a Change Master Record.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418

Exercise 20: Changes with a Change Master Record... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421Lesson: Recipe Approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429

Exercise 21: Recipe Approval .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit 12: Engineering Change Management, Recipe Approval PLM115

Lesson: Engineering Change Management - Overview

Lesson OverviewThis lesson gives you an overview of how to use the engineering change management.


� Describe the principle of using the engineering change management

Business ExampleYou use the engineering change management to plan and document changes.

Engineering Change Management

Figure 124: Engineering Change Management

Engineering change management (ECH) is a central, integrated part of product datamanagement (PDM) within the standard SAP System.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Lesson: Engineering Change Management - Overview

Why Use Engineering Change Management for Changes?

Figure 125: Why Use Engineering Change Management for Changes?

Engineering change management is a central logistics function that can be used tochange various types of master data and document the changes.

A valid-from date for the change master record (or the engineering changerequest/engineering change order) is used to make changes valid on a predefineddate. This enables long-term planning.

You can use engineering change management to store SAP objects (for example,BOMs or routings) more than once. This means that the objects can be stored in allrelevant change statuses.

The changes take effect automatically at the predefined time in all areas of thelogistics process chain (for example, sales order, material requirements planning,and shop floor and production control).

You can use engineering change managment to group changes made to different SAPobjects that are affected by one change. You can change all the objects at the sametime, or you can define different change dates for individual objects. You can creategeneral documentation for all changes made as well as special documentation for eachspecific object change.

You can use engineering change management to fulfill your legal obligations todocument changes.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Changes With and Without History

Figure 126: Changes With and Without History

You can make object changes (for example, BOM and master recipe changes) inthe SAP System either with or without history. The system can generate changedocuments even for changes without history.

Change without historyThese are changes that do not have to be documented because they take placeduring the development stage of the product, for example.The status of the object before the change is not saved. You can only find outabout the status of the object before the change by using change documents.

Change with historyThese are changes that must be documented because they take place duringproduction, for example.Both the status before and after the change is saved. The system also generateschange documents. For some objects, these change documents differ from thosegenerated for changes without history.Engineering change management in the SAP System allows for completedocumentation of changes. Some of these changes may be needed, for example,for product liability purposes.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Lesson: Engineering Change Management - Overview

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Describe the principle of using the engineering change management



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson: Changes with a Change Master Record

Lesson OverviewThis lesson familiarizes you with making changes using change master records.


� Make changes using change master records

Business ExampleFor reasons of product safety, some master data changes in your enterprise have to bemade with reference to change master records.

Change Master Record (Change Number)

Figure 127: Change Master Record (Change Number)



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Lesson: Changes with a Change Master Record

Change master records (synonymous with change numbers) are used to plan changesin advance and combine related changes to different objects, such as master recipes,materials, and bills of material. They are created within engineering changemanagement and can contain such information as:

� Detailed documentation of planned changes� The date from which the changes are to be valid� The types of objects and, if required, object management records for the

individual objects to be changed� A special authorization that you need to work with the change master record

You can create, change, or display a master recipe with reference to a change masterrecord. The valid-from date in the change master record is then used as the key date.This implies:

� When you create a recipe, the new recipe is valid from this date.� When you display or change a recipe, the system selects the recipe valid on

this date.� Unlike recipe maintenance without a change number, the system creates a new

change status for all changed recipe objects. This change status is valid from thevalid-from date of the change number.

Changes with a Change Master Record

Figure 128: Changes with a Change Master Record



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


A change becomes effective on a precisely defined date.

The changed object is saved twice: in its state before and after the change. Thestate of the object before the change ends with the valid-to date. The state after thechange begins with the valid-from date.

Changes are documented in a change master record.

Structure of a Change Master Record

Change headerChange numberValid-from dateAuthorization groupReason for change

Object typesMaster recipesMaterial BOMsDocuments...

Object mgmt records(for example) Master recipe "Colors"...

In the change header, a short description of the change, the valid-from date, and thestatus is maintained.

You determine the object types which may be changed with the change master record.

One of the functions of the object management record is to enable you to documentchanges to a specific object.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Exercise 20: Changes with a Change MasterRecord

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Create change master records

Business ExampleFor reasons of product safety, some master data changes in your enterprise have to bemade with reference to change master records.

Task 1:Creating change master records (change numbers)

1. Create two change master records to change master recipes:

Cross-Application Components→ Engineering Change Management→ ChangeNumber→ Create

The Create Change Master: Initial Screen appears.

Change number: AEND_01_##

(or) AEND_02_##

Type: Change Master

The Create Change Master: Change Header screen appears

Description: Change number of group ##Valid from: Today + 1 week for AEND_01_##

Today + 2 weeks for AEND_02_##Change no. status: 01 Active

After you choose Enter, the Create Change Master: Object Types screen appears.

Define that master recipes and material BOMs can be specified as changeableobjects, by choosing

Edit→ Other→ Spec. object types and




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Object type specification: Task list and BOM

Choose Copy

Set the following indicators for the object types Master recipe and MaterialBOM:

� Actv

� Object

� MgtRec

Note: By setting these indicators, you define that:

i) Master recipes and material BOMS (and thus production versions) can bechanged with reference to this change number

ii) Object management records are automatically created for the changed objects

Save your change master records.

Task 2:Changing master recipe objects with change numbers

1. Change the master recipe T-DET1## with reference to the change numberAEND_01_##

Access the master recipe from mass maintenance for production versions. Beforeaccessing the recipe, you must assign the change number to the correspondingproduction version.

Change the charge quantity range of your recipe to 1000 -40000 L.

Then display the administrative data.

Save your recipe.

2. Change your master recipe T-DET1## with reference to the change numberAEND_02_##.

Change the charge quantity range back to the original value (1000 � 20000 L)for the validity area of the second change number.

Display the administrative data for the recipe.

Save your recipe again.

3. Display the header data for recipe T-DET1## and the administrative data for thefollowing key dates:




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


� Today

� Today +10 days

� Today + 20 days

Task 3:Documentation of changes

1. Documentation in the change master record

Display the change master record AEND_01_##.

Which master recipe was changed with the change number, that is, for whichmaster recipe was an object management record generated?

_____________________

2. Recipe changes

Which changes were made to the recipe header of recipe 1 in recipe groupT-DET1##?

Use the Recipe Changes reporting function to answer this question.

______________________________________

______________________________________

______________________________________



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Solution 20: Changes with a Change MasterRecordTask 1:Creating change master records (change numbers)

1. Create two change master records to change master recipes:

Cross-Application Components→ Engineering Change Management→ ChangeNumber→ Create

The Create Change Master: Initial Screen appears.


(or) AEND_02_##

Type: Change Master

The Create Change Master: Change Header screen appears

Description: Change number of group ##Valid from: Today + 1 week for AEND_01_##

Today + 2 weeks for AEND_02_##Change no. status: 01 Active

After you choose Enter, the Create Change Master: Object Types screen appears.

Define that master recipes and material BOMs can be specified as changeableobjects, by choosing

Edit→ Other→ Spec. object types and

Object type specification: Task list and BOM

Choose Copy

Set the following indicators for the object types Master recipe and MaterialBOM:

� Actv

� Object

� MgtRec

Note: By setting these indicators, you define that:Continued on next page



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


i) Master recipes and material BOMS (and thus production versions) can bechanged with reference to this change number

ii) Object management records are automatically created for the changed objects

Save your change master records.

a) See exercise

Task 2:Changing master recipe objects with change numbers

1. Change the master recipe T-DET1## with reference to the change numberAEND_01_##

Access the master recipe from mass maintenance for production versions. Beforeaccessing the recipe, you must assign the change number to the correspondingproduction version.

Change the charge quantity range of your recipe to 1000 -40000 L.

Then display the administrative data.

Save your recipe.

a) Production � Process→ Master Data→ Material Master→ ProductionVersions

Group Counter: T-DET1##


Choose the Assign change number icon


Choose Recipe

Recipe header tab

Enter the new charge quantity range as given in the exercise.

Administrative data tab

The recipe is now assigned the change number together with its validityrange.

Save the recipe.

Choose the Refresh icon.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


2. Change your master recipe T-DET1## with reference to the change numberAEND_02_##.

Change the charge quantity range back to the original value (1000 � 20000 L)for the validity area of the second change number.

Display the administrative data for the recipe.

Save your recipe again.

a) Procedure known

3. Display the header data for recipe T-DET1## and the administrative data for thefollowing key dates:

� Today

� Today +10 days

� Today + 20 days

a) Select the production version

Choose Recipe

Enter key date.

Choose the Display recipe icon.

Recipe header and Administrative data tab page

Task 3:Documentation of changes

1. Documentation in the change master record

Display the change master record AEND_01_##.

Which master recipe was changed with the change number, that is, for whichmaster recipe was an object management record generated?

_____________________

a) (�)→ Change Number→ Display

Change Header screen:

Choose All objects

There is an object management record for recipe

T-DET1##




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


2. Recipe changes

Which changes were made to the recipe header of recipe 1 in recipe groupT-DET1##?

Use the Recipe Changes reporting function to answer this question.

______________________________________

______________________________________

______________________________________

a) (�)→ Master Recipes→ Reporting→ Recipe→ Recipe Changes

Task List Type: 2Plant: 1100Task List/Recipe Group: T-DET1##Group Counter/Recipe: 1

Detailed Change Documentation For: Header

Program→ Execute

Changes were made to the lot size (charge quantity range) using thechange number from exercise 1.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Make changes using change master records



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Lesson: Recipe Approval

Lesson: Recipe Approval

Lesson OverviewThis lesson familiarizes you with the recipe approval.


� Create and process engineering change requests / engineering change orders� Carry out an approval procedure for master recipes

Business ExampleIn part of your company, an approval is needed to create and change master recipes.

You get an overview of how ECC Engineering Change Management can be used tomap approval procedures for master recipes onto the system.

Engineering Change Request / Order

Figure 129: Engineering Change Request / Order



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Engineering change orders have the functionality of change master records. However,they comprise the following additional functions:

� The possibility of triggering a workflow task, such as sending a message to theperson responsible at a particular processing stage

� A procedure for the approval and release of changes during which an unapprovedengineering change request is converted into an approved engineering changeorder

� The assignment of a user status profile to extend the system status network� The assignment of authorizations for user statuses

You can create, change, or display a master recipe with reference to an engineeringchange order. The valid-from date of the engineering change order is then used as thekey date. The engineering change order must meet the following requirements:

� It must have been approved and contain at least one object management record� If a corresponding change rule has been maintained for the recipe, the change

type of the object management record must also be identical to that in the recipeheader.

� To maintain component assignments, material quantity calculation, and the billof material from within the recipe, you also need an object management recordwith approved changes for the bill of material.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Structure of an Engineering Change Request

Figure 130: Structure of an Engineering Change Request

General header data of the engineering change request:

� The engineering change request is identified by the change number you enter.� The change type controls the change process for the entire request using a

system status profile. You can assign a user status profile and workflow tasks fordifferent processing steps to the change type.

� The valid-from date specifies the date on which the changes come into effect.� By entering an authorization group, you can define that a special authorization is

required to maintain the engineering change request.� Entering a reason for the change enables you to document planned changes fully.

Allowed object types:

� You must define the object types that may be changed with the engineeringchange request. These include, for instance, master recipes, material BOMs,and material master records.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Creating object management records for objects you want to change:

� You must create an object management change record for every object youwant to change using the engineering change request. An example for a changeobject would be a certain master recipe.

� You maintain a change type for each object management record. The changetype controls the change process for the specific object.

� Entering a reason for the change for an object management record enables you todocument planned changes of a particular object fully.

Change Master Record and Engineering ChangeRequest/Order: Comparison

Figure 131: Change Master Record and Engineering Change Request/Order:Comparison

In contrast to the engineering change requests/orders, you may not enter any changetypes for change master records. There is no system status network for change masterrecords either.

Since object management records are not automatically generated for the engineeringchange request/order, the icon for this does not appear in the object type overview.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


You cannot use the automatic generation function here, because the engineeringchange request/order is to control the business processes of requesting, inspecting, andreleasing changes for certain assigned objects. This excludes an implied assignmentduring object change itself (by using the change number).

Hint: The example in the graphic corresponds to the default setting for theengineering change request/order.

Changing Master Recipes

Figure 132: Changing Master Recipes

In process industries, requirements for documentation and checking of master recipesvary widely depending on the branch of industry and the product. They range fromfairly unrestricted maintenance of recipes over detailed planning, documentationto strict approval procedures.

To meet these requirements, the SAP R/3 System offers various types of recipemaintenance. You can enter a change rule in the recipe to specify the maintenanceprocedure that is to be used for a recipe.

You can create or change master recipes as follows:

Without a change number:All you need is an authorization for the corresponding recipe transactions.Changes are valid for the entire validity period of the selected recipe objectversion.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


With a change number:By using a change master record, you can combine the planning and executionof changes to related objects such as recipes, materials, and bills of material.The validity date is specified using a change master record (synonymous withchange number). A new change status is created for all changed recipe objects(for example, operation, relationship).

With an engineering change order:With engineering change orders, the functionality of the change master record isenhanced by a detailed approval procedure. By entering a change type, you canspecify that the approval procedure must be carried out in a specific user-definedway.

As soon as you have assigned a change rule to a recipe and thus defined that it issubject to a specific change procedure, this recipe is locked for all change proceduresthat are less restrictive.

Recipe Approval (General Procedure)

Figure 133: Recipe Approval (General Procedure)



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


The change procedure using an engineering change request comprises three mainsteps:

� Creating an engineering change request� Checking an engineering change request and converting it into an engineering

change order� Changing objects and completing the change

For a master recipe marked with change type 'With engineering change order', thisprocess represents an approval procedure. Once the procedure has been released, themaintained recipe is marked as 'Approved recipe' for the change period defined by thevalid-from date of the change request.

Recipes that have already been approved but are changed using another engineeringchange order are considered unapproved during the period between the conversionand release for the change period defined by the valid-from date. Approval is grantedwhen the change order is released.

Recipe Approval (Status Sequence I)

Figure 134: Recipe Approval (Status Sequence I)

The procedure for approving and releasing engineering change requests or orders iscontrolled via links between statuses and business transactions. The statuses markparticular processing statuses during the approval procedure. They include:

� A fixed network of system statuses� Company-specific user statuses



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


You can proceed from one status to the next by carrying out a business transaction.

SAP has defined a standard approval procedure, which has been implemented viaa network of system statuses:

1. An engineering change request is created which describes planned changes tovarious objects, including master recipes.

2. The planned changes to the individual objects are checked and marked as possibleor unnecessary.

3. After the check, the engineering change request is approved and converted into anengineering change order. Now the changes can be made, that is, the master recipecan be maintained with reference to the engineering change order.

Recipe Approval (Status Sequence II)

Figure 135: Recipe Approval (Status Sequence II)

4. After the changes to all objects have been made, the entire engineering changeorder is completed.

5. The processing of the engineering change order ends with its release.

The recipe has now been approved and can be used to create an approved process order.

If the approval procedure defined by SAP does not meet all your requirements,you can add company-specific checks at the change order header or change objectlevel. To do so, assign a change type with a corresponding user status profile to theengineering change request or the change object.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Status profiles are defined and assigned to change types within Customizing forengineering change management. They contain company-specific user statuses. In thestatus profile, you link these user statuses to the business transactions you carry out,thus inserting them in the existing network of system statuses.

You can specify that a special authorization is required to set or delete a user status.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Exercise 21: Recipe Approval

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Create and process engineering change requests / engineering change orders� Carry out approval procedures for master recipes

Business ExampleIn part of your company, an approval is needed to create and change master recipes.

You get an overview of how ECC Engineering Change Management can be used tomap approval procedures for master recipes onto the system.

Task 1:Change rule

1. Select the production version for recipe T-HTB2##.

Can you change the production version?

____________________________

2. A message exists for the production version. What information does the messagecontain?

_____________________________________________

_____________________________________________

_____________________________________________

3. Open the master recipe T-TAB## for production version 0001 of materialT-HTB2## on the key date Today.

To which processing mode (display or change) does the system take you?

__________________________________

4. Use F1 help, to find out the meaning and function of the �Change rule� and�Change type� fields in the recipe header.

Which change rule and change type are set?




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Change rule:Change type:

Save the recipe.

Task 2:Creating an engineering change request

1. In engineering change management, create change request REQUEST## ofchange type 200 �Change recipes�.

Production - Process→ Master Data→ Engineering Change Management→Change Number→ Create

Change number: REQUEST##Type: Engineering change requestChange type: 200

Choose Enter.

Make the following entries on the �Create ECR: Change Header� screen:

Description: Recipe change T-TAB##Valid from: Today + 1 weekChange no. status: 01 �Actv�Reason for change: Display SOP in PI sheet for T-TAB##

Choose Enter.

Allow the changeability of the object types �Master recipe� and �MaterialBOM�.

Edit→ Other→ Spec. object types

Indicator �Task list� and �BOM�

Set the �Actv� indicator and �Object� indicator for the object types �Masterrecipe� and �Material BOM�. Delete all indicators set for other object types.

Define recipe T-TAB## and the BOM for material T-HTB2## as change objects.

Choose Objects.Continued on next page



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Choose TaskL tab.

TLstTy Group Description Change type2 T-TAB## Add new

proc.inst. forSOP call up.

200

Mat. BOM tab

Material Plant BOM Usg Description Change typeT-HTB2## 1100 1 No change 200

Note: You must create an object management record even if you do not planto change the BOM. Before changing the recipe, you must assign the changeorder/request to the relevant production version. The system then checkswhether valid object management records exist for the recipe and BOM.

Enter, for example, the following long text for the object management recordwith regard to the planned recipe change:

(TaskL tab / �Details view� icon for T-TAB## / �Object long text� icon)

Due to a new safety rating of material T-HTB2##, you must be able to callup the Standard Operating Procedures (SOP) SOP 123-XY from the archivesystem in the PI sheet for phase 120. You must therefore adjust the addressdata of process instruction DOC_SHOW for phase 120. The change must bevalid from the date today + 1 week.

2. Which statuses are set for your change objects?

In the relevant object management record for the recipe or BOM:

Choose Status mgmt.

System statuses:

____________________________________

User status:

____________________________________

____________________________________

____________________________________

3. Which statuses are set for the change request?Continued on next page



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Choose the Change header icon and then Status mgmt.

System status

____________________________________

User status:

____________________________________

Save your change request.

Task 3:Now try to assign your change request REQUEST## to production version 0001of material T-HTB2##.

1. The system issues a message. Display the message log. What is the message textfor the error message?

______________________________________________________

2. Find out more about the reasons for the error and how to fix it by double-clickingthe error message.

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

Task 4:Checking, approving, and converting the engineering change request

Checking

1. Set the status �Check request� for the engineering change request REQUEST##.

(...) → Change Number→ Change and in the change header: Set status icon

Choose Check req.

Choose Continue.

2. Can you set the object system status �Change possible� for the changemanagement records of the recipe or BOM at the moment?

____________________________________

(In the object management record of the recipe or BOM, choose the Set statusicon.)




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


3. Before the system status can be set, the persons authorized to do so must firstrevoke the user statuses taking effect at the moment.

Revoke the user statuses for the objects Recipe and BOM.

(In the object management record of the recipe or BOM, choose Status mgmt andremove the indicators for the user statuses.)

4. Set the system status �Change possible� for the objects.

(In the object management record of the recipe or BOM, choose the Set statusicon and then choose Change possible.)

5. Approving and converting

Which additional system status was set for the change header?

_____________________________________

(In the change header, choose Status mgmt.)

6. Set the system status to �ECR checked�.

(In the change header, choose the Set status icon. Choose Request checked.)

7. The request must now be approved and converted to an engineering changeorder before the change objects can be processed. Before you can set thecorresponding status, the user status BETR that is already set must be withdrawnby an authorized person.

Withdraw the user status and set the system status �Approve request� and�Convert request�.

(In the change header, choose Status mgmt. and remove the indicator for userstatus BETR.

In the change header, choose the Set status icon. Choose Request checked.Choose Convert request)

Save your engineering change order.

Task 5:Changing with an engineering change order

1. Now change your master recipe T-TAB## with reference to your engineeringchange order REQUEST##.

First, select the production version for material T-HTB2## and assign requestREQUEST## to the production version.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Access the recipe. You can now change the recipe.

Change the process instruction DOC_SHOW for phase 120. Call up the processinstruction in the PI assistant and enter the new value SOP 123-XY for parameterDOCUMENT in the import parameters for the function call.

Save the changed recipe.

Task 6:Closing and releasing object changes and engineering change orders

1. Call up your engineering change order REQUEST## in the change mode.

Which statuses does the engineering change order have?

_____________________________________

_____________________________________

_____________________________________

_____________________________________

Which statuses do the change objects have?

_____________________________________

_____________________________________

_____________________________________

_____________________________________

2. Set the status �Complete change� for the change objects.

Which system statuses do the change objects have now?

_____________________________________

_____________________________________

_____________________________________

Which user statuses were set when you closed?

_____________________________________

_____________________________________

_____________________________________




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


The change objects can only be released after being inspected by the responsibleareas defined by the user statuses. These authorized users withdraw their userstatus after inspection, and the object can then be released.

Withdraw the user statuses for the change object and then set the system status�Release change�.

3. Set the system status �Complete order� for the engineering change order.

Which system statuses does the engineering change order have now?

_____________________________________

_____________________________________

_____________________________________

_____________________________________

_____________________________________

_____________________________________

Which user status was set while closing?

_____________________________________

The engineering change order can only be released and the correspondingapproval granted after being inspected by the responsible area defined by theorder user status BETR. An authorized person withdraws the user status afterinspection and releases the order.

Withdraw the user status BETR for the order and set the order system statusto �Release change�.


Task 7:Status report on engineering change order

1. Display a detailed status report on your engineering change order.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Solution 21: Recipe ApprovalTask 1:Change rule

1. Select the production version for recipe T-HTB2##.

Can you change the production version?

____________________________

a) Production � Process→ Master Data→ Material Master→ ProductionVersions

Material: T-HTB2##

You cannot change the production version.

2. A message exists for the production version. What information does the messagecontain?

_____________________________________________

_____________________________________________

_____________________________________________

a) The message tells you that the production version belongs to a reciperequiring approval.

You cannot change the production version, recipe, or BOM until a validengineering change order has been assigned.

3. Open the master recipe T-TAB## for production version 0001 of materialT-HTB2## on the key date Today.

To which processing mode (display or change) does the system take you?

__________________________________

a) Select production version 0001.

Choose Recipe

The system takes you to the display mode.

4. Use F1 help, to find out the meaning and function of the �Change rule� and�Change type� fields in the recipe header.

Which change rule and change type are set?




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Change rule:Change type:

Save the recipe.

a) Recipe header tab

Change rule: �With engineering change order(with change type)�

Change type: 200 �Change recipes�

Task 2:Creating an engineering change request

1. In engineering change management, create change request REQUEST## ofchange type 200 �Change recipes�.

Production - Process→ Master Data→ Engineering Change Management→Change Number→ Create

Change number: REQUEST##Type: Engineering change requestChange type: 200

Choose Enter.

Make the following entries on the �Create ECR: Change Header� screen:

Description: Recipe change T-TAB##Valid from: Today + 1 weekChange no. status: 01 �Actv�Reason for change: Display SOP in PI sheet for T-TAB##

Choose Enter.

Allow the changeability of the object types �Master recipe� and �MaterialBOM�.

Edit→ Other→ Spec. object types




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Indicator �Task list� and �BOM�

Set the �Actv� indicator and �Object� indicator for the object types �Masterrecipe� and �Material BOM�. Delete all indicators set for other object types.

Define recipe T-TAB## and the BOM for material T-HTB2## as change objects.

Choose Objects.

Choose TaskL tab.

TLstTy Group Description Change type2 T-TAB## Add new

proc.inst. forSOP call up.

200

Mat. BOM tab

Material Plant BOM Usg Description Change typeT-HTB2## 1100 1 No change 200

Note: You must create an object management record even if you do not planto change the BOM. Before changing the recipe, you must assign the changeorder/request to the relevant production version. The system then checkswhether valid object management records exist for the recipe and BOM.

Enter, for example, the following long text for the object management recordwith regard to the planned recipe change:

(TaskL tab / �Details view� icon for T-TAB## / �Object long text� icon)

Due to a new safety rating of material T-HTB2##, you must be able to callup the Standard Operating Procedures (SOP) SOP 123-XY from the archivesystem in the PI sheet for phase 120. You must therefore adjust the addressdata of process instruction DOC_SHOW for phase 120. The change must bevalid from the date today + 1 week.

a) Production - Process→Master Data→ Engineering Change Management→ Change Number→ Create

2. Which statuses are set for your change objects?

In the relevant object management record for the recipe or BOM:

Choose Status mgmt.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


System statuses:

____________________________________

User status:

____________________________________

____________________________________

____________________________________

a) System statuses:

Created

User status:

CHEM: Check by chemist

QUAL: Check by quality assurance

PROC: Check by process technology

3. Which statuses are set for the change request?

Choose the Change header icon and then Status mgmt.

System status

____________________________________

User status:

____________________________________

Save your change request.

a) System status

Created

User status:

Check by plant management

Task 3:Now try to assign your change request REQUEST## to production version 0001of material T-HTB2##.

1. The system issues a message. Display the message log. What is the message textfor the error message?




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


______________________________________________________

a) (...) → Production Versions

Message log / message text for error message:

System status: ECR is not yet approved

2. Find out more about the reasons for the error and how to fix it by double-clickingthe error message.

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

a) Reasons for the error and how to fix it:

The system checks the system status of the engineering change request.The engineering change request must be approved and converted to anengineering change order.

Task 4:Checking, approving, and converting the engineering change request

Checking

1. Set the status �Check request� for the engineering change request REQUEST##.

(...) → Change Number→ Change and in the change header: Set status icon

Choose Check req.

Choose Continue.

a) See exercise

2. Can you set the object system status �Change possible� for the changemanagement records of the recipe or BOM at the moment?

____________________________________

(In the object management record of the recipe or BOM, choose the Set statusicon.)

a) No, the user statuses must first be withdrawn.

3. Before the system status can be set, the persons authorized to do so must firstrevoke the user statuses taking effect at the moment.

Revoke the user statuses for the objects Recipe and BOM.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


(In the object management record of the recipe or BOM, choose Status mgmt andremove the indicators for the user statuses.)

a) See exercise

4. Set the system status �Change possible� for the objects.

(In the object management record of the recipe or BOM, choose the Set statusicon and then choose Change possible.)

a) See exercise

5. Approving and converting

Which additional system status was set for the change header?

_____________________________________


a) Status: All objects checked

6. Set the system status to �ECR checked�.

(In the change header, choose the Set status icon. Choose Request checked.)

a) See exercise

7. The request must now be approved and converted to an engineering changeorder before the change objects can be processed. Before you can set thecorresponding status, the user status BETR that is already set must be withdrawnby an authorized person.

Withdraw the user status and set the system status �Approve request� and�Convert request�.

(In the change header, choose Status mgmt. and remove the indicator for userstatus BETR.

In the change header, choose the Set status icon. Choose Request checked.Choose Convert request)


a) See exercise




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Task 5:Changing with an engineering change order

1. Now change your master recipe T-TAB## with reference to your engineeringchange order REQUEST##.

First, select the production version for material T-HTB2## and assign requestREQUEST## to the production version.

Access the recipe. You can now change the recipe.

Change the process instruction DOC_SHOW for phase 120. Call up the processinstruction in the PI assistant and enter the new value SOP 123-XY for parameterDOCUMENT in the import parameters for the function call.

Save the changed recipe.

a) (...) → Production Versions

Material: T-HTB2##

Select the production version

Choose the Assign change number icon.

Assign REQUEST##.

Choose Recipe

Operations tab

Select phase 120 and choose the Proc.instr. icon.

Change DOC_SHOW as described in the exercise.

Save the recipe.

Task 6:Closing and releasing object changes and engineering change orders

1. Call up your engineering change order REQUEST## in the change mode.

Which statuses does the engineering change order have?

_____________________________________

_____________________________________

_____________________________________

_____________________________________




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Which statuses do the change objects have?

_____________________________________

_____________________________________

_____________________________________

_____________________________________

a) (...) → Change Number→ Change

Statuses of the change order:


All objects checked

ECR checked

ECR approved

ECO to be processed

Choose Back.

Statuses of the change objects:

Choose Objects.

Select both objects.

Choose the Details view icon.

Choose Status mgmt.

Created

Object: Change possible

Object: To be processed

Object: In process

Choose Back.

2. Set the status �Complete change� for the change objects.

Which system statuses do the change objects have now?

_____________________________________

_____________________________________




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


_____________________________________

Which user statuses were set when you closed?

_____________________________________

_____________________________________

_____________________________________

The change objects can only be released after being inspected by the responsibleareas defined by the user statuses. These authorized users withdraw their userstatus after inspection, and the object can then be released.

Withdraw the user statuses for the change object and then set the system status�Release change�.

a) Set the status �Complete change� for the change objects.

In the relevant object management record, choose the Set status icon

Choose Complete changes.

Choose Continue in the relevant object management record.

Choose Status mgmt.

System status: Created

Object: Change possible

Object: Change completed

User status:

CHEM: Check by chemist

QUAL: Check by quality assurance

PROC: Check by process technology

For the relevant object in status management:

Remove all indicators for the user statuses.

Choose Back.

Choose the Set status icon.

Choose Release changes.

Choose Continue.

3. Set the system status �Complete order� for the engineering change order.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Which system statuses does the engineering change order have now?

_____________________________________

_____________________________________

_____________________________________

_____________________________________

_____________________________________

_____________________________________

Which user status was set while closing?

_____________________________________

The engineering change order can only be released and the correspondingapproval granted after being inspected by the responsible area defined by theorder user status BETR. An authorized person withdraws the user status afterinspection and releases the order.

Withdraw the user status BETR for the order and set the order system statusto �Release change�.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y



a) Choose the Change header icon.


Choose Complete order.

Choose Continue.

System statuses of the change order:

Choose Status mgmt.

All objects checked

ECR checked

ECR approved

ECO confirmed

ECO completed

All objects released

User status:

Check by plant management

Remove indicator for user status

Choose Back.


Choose Release order.

A message appears that the engineering change order has been released.

Choose Continue.

Save order




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Task 7:Status report on engineering change order

1. Display a detailed status report on your engineering change order.

a) (...) → Change Number→ Change

Choose Enter (if warnings occur, choose Enter to confirm).

Environment→ Reporting→ Status Report

or

Status report icon for system status



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Create and process engineering change requests / engineering change orders� Carry out an approval procedure for master recipes



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Unit Summary

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:� Describe the principle of using the engineering change management� Make changes using change master records� Create and process engineering change requests / engineering change orders� Carry out an approval procedure for master recipes



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit Summary PLM115



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Test Your Knowledge

1. What do we want to achieve by using the engineering change management?

2. Explain the structure of a change master record.

3. Name the keywords for the change procedure using an engineering changerequest.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Answers

1. What do we want to achieve by using the engineering change management?

Answer:

� Planning and realization of master data changes at a specified time� Monitoring and documentation of changes� Storing a number of change statuses for different times� Grouping of related changes

2. Explain the structure of a change master record.

Answer:

� Change header:

In the change header, a description of the change, the valid-from date,and the status is maintained.

� Object types:

You determine the object types which may be changed with the changemaster record.

� Object mgmt records:

One of the functions of the object management record is to enable you todocument changes to a specific object.

3. Name the keywords for the change procedure using an engineering changerequest.

Answer:

� Creating engineering change request� Checking planned changes� Approving the changes� Applying engineering change request in change order� Making the object changes� Completing and releasing changes/ engineering change order



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit 13Appendix

Unit OverviewThe appendix introduces you to fundamental aspects of material costing, integration(ECC - SCM APO) and recipe management.


� Describe the principle of material costing with a quantity structure.� Describe the principle of the integration of the ECC and SCM (APO) software

components.� Describe the basics of recipe management.� Describe the transformation of a general recipe into a master recipe.

Unit ContentsLesson: Material Costing .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464Lesson: Integration of ECC and SCM (APO) ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467Lesson: Basics of Recipe Management ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit 13: Appendix PLM115

Lesson: Material Costing

Lesson OverviewThis lesson familiarizes you with the principle of the material costing with a quantitystructure.


� Describe the principle of material costing with a quantity structure.

Business ExampleYou have to regularly perform material costing with a quantity structure for yourmaterials produced in-house.

Figure 136: Material Costing: Objectives

Material costing uses data from Logistics, such as the material BOM and the masterrecipe, as the quantity structure to calculate costs for material consumption and theactivities.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Lesson: Material Costing

Material costing valuates this quantity structure with:

� Prices for materials in the material master� Prices for activities in Cost Center Accounting� Prices for processes in Activity-Based Costing� Overhead on the direct costs for these materials and activities� Overhead for sales and administration costs

You can analyze the results in different ways.

The analysis is, for example, used for pricing or valuation.

Executing a Material Cost Estimate

Figure 137: Executing a Material Cost Estimate

When you create a cost estimate with a quantity structure, you enter the costingvariant, the material, the plant, and the costing version. If you do not enter a costinglot size, the default value from the material master record is used. The systemdetermines and valuates the quantity structure automatically.

The dates are proposed from the costing variant and determine the following:

� The valuation date for the materials and activities� The validity period of the cost estimate (costing date from/to)� The determination of the quantity structure (quantity structure date)



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Describe the principle of material costing with a quantity structure.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Lesson: Integration of ECC and SCM (APO)

Lesson: Integration of ECC and SCM (APO)

Lesson OverviewThis lesson gives you an overview of the integration of the ECC and SCM (APO)software components.


� Describe the principle of the integration of the ECC and SCM (APO) softwarecomponents.

Business ExampleYour enterprise wants to use the software component SCM (APO).

Supply Chain Master Data in ECC and SCM (APO)

Figure 138: Supply Chain Master Data in ECC and SCM (APO)

The APO Core Interface (CIF) defines and controls the data transfer between ECCand SCM (APO) Systems. The CIF is the central interface for connecting SCM (APO)to the existing ECC System environment.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


APO-CIF is a real-time interface. Out of the ECC's complex data quantity, only thosedata objects that are needed for planning and optimization processes in the SCM(APO) data structures suited for supply chain planning are transferred to SCM (APO).

To specify which master and transaction data is transferred to SCM (APO), you definean integration model in ECC.

Both the initial data transfer (initial transfer) and the data changes (transfer of datachanges) within SCM (APO) take place using the SCM (APO) Core Interface (CIF).

The master data objects in SCM (APO) are generally not identical to those in ECC.For the master data transfer, it is in fact the relevant ECC master data that is mappedonto the corresponding planning master data in SCM (APO).

The ECC System remains the dominant system for the master data. You only createthat specific SCM (APO) master data that does not exist in ECC, directly in SCM(APO).

An RFC connection with the ECC System is a technical requirement for successfuldata transfer into SCM (APO) using the Core Interface.

Initial Transfer of Master Data: Overview

Figure 139: Initial Transfer of Master Data: Overview

You define the integration model that controls the transfer of master and transactiondata in the ECC System. You can find the menu option �Core Interface AdvancedPlanner and Optimizer� (the �CIF menu�) under Logistics→ Central Functions→Supply Chain Planning Interface.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


The integration model distinguishes between master data and transaction data. Werecommend that you select the two types of data in separate integration modelsand then transfer them separately. In the integration model, you select the dataset(master or transaction data) that you want to transfer. You specify the following inthe integration model:

� The SCM (APO) target system for the data transfer� The data objects you want to transfer

You can delete integration models that you no longer need, but note that you mustfirst deactivate them.

ECC Master Recipe and SCM (APO) PPM

Figure 140: ECC Master Recipe and SCM (APO) PPM



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Phase/Activity Relationships

Figure 141: Phase/Activity Relationships



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Transaction Data of the Supply Chain in ECC and SCM(APO)

Figure 142: Transaction Data of the Supply Chain in ECC and SCM (APO)

To specify which transaction data is transferred to SCM (APO), you also define anintegration model in ECC. The transaction data is mapped to orders in SCM (APO) thatdiffer by ATP category. This means that the transaction data objects of SCM (APO)are not identical to those of ECC. Object mapping takes place via the Core Interface.

As for master data, an initial data transfer of transaction data also takes place first.This is usually followed automatically by the incremental data transfer between ECCand SCM (APO) for transaction data objects that are members of an active integrationmodel. This means that new transaction data or changes to existing transaction dataare transferred automatically.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Describe the principle of the integration of the ECC and SCM (APO) software

components.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Lesson: Basics of Recipe Management

Lesson: Basics of Recipe Management

Lesson Overview� Recipe management

� Application� Recipe types� PLM and SCM integration� Recipe elements� Required application components

� Recipe workbench� Transformation of a general recipe into a master recipe


� Describe the basics of recipe management.� Describe the transformation of a general recipe into a master recipe.

Business ExampleTo support the product development in your enterprise, you need a tool for thedevelopment of recipes.

The scope of the functions should range from the detailed definition of cross-enterpriseproduct specifications and the additional definition of special location-independentproperties to the creation of recipies that can be used productively in the individualplants.

For this purpose, you decide to introduce the SAP Recipe Management.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Recipe Management: Application

Figure 143: Recipe Management: Application

The recipe management

� Supports the development process of a product� Becomes active at the product idea stage and accompanies the process all the

way to the detailed specification and process definition� Supports and enables communication between areas

The recipe is the central object of the recipe management. You use it to describethe manufacturing of products and the execution of a process. Recipes includeinformation on the products and components of a process, the process steps to becarried out, and the resources required for the production.

Target group/customer group:

� Process industries - emphasis on consumer packaged goods, chemical andpharmaceutical industries



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


User group:

� Central product development

� Developing new products and changing and adapting exisiting products� Production area

� Converting recipies into production recipes

Recipe Types

Figure 144: Recipe Types

Recipes are used on different enterprise levels. They form the basis for cross-enterpriseinvestment decisions and for location-related long-term planning and for applyinga process on site. You use the recipe types of the recipe management to create,as required, a general description of the requirements or a concrete process rule.By specifying the data for cross-enterprise recipes, you derive location- andbranch-specific recipes from them.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


PLM and SCM Integration

Figure 145: PLM and SCM Integration

The branch-specific master recipe of the recipe management is not yet integrated intothe standard processes of the SAP production planning. However, by linking themaster recipe with a production version, you create a reference to the productivelyusable master recipe and the BOM of the SAP standard system.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Recipes: Elements and Integration

Figure 146: Recipes: Elements and Integration

� Environment, Health and Safety (EH&S)

Processing recipe formulas and information systems and generating formuladata and reports

� Engineering Change Management (LO-ECH)

Change management

� Classification System (CA-CL)

Classification of recipes

Property tree and evaluations in formulas, and evaluations in the recipe

� Quality Planning (QM-PT)

Recording data for the quality inspection

� Basic Data (production planning for process industries) (PP-PI-MD)

Assigning a production version to the recipe

� Material Master (LO-MD-MM)

Recording material data in formulas



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Recipe Workbench

Figure 147: Recipe Workbench

The recipe workbench is the initial screen for the simultaneous processing of differentapplication objects in the Recipe Management. You can use the workbench to navigatebetween different applications within a single interface.

The screen is divided into the navigation area and the application area.

� The navigation area shows a navigation tree, a symbol bar that supports thenavigation, and a detail area showing the structure details of the selected object.

� The application area shows the data of the selected objects and the status menu.It is also a selection and result area of the information systems for the individualobjects.

It supports drag & drop functions to pull, create and copy objects between differentscreen areas and within the same screen area.

A personalization function allows you to save individual user settings for theworkbench.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Recipe Transformation in Master Recipes (I)

Figure 148: Recipe Transformation in Master Recipes (I)

A general recipe can be transformed into a master recipe. The general recipe serves asa template for the production version, the master recipe and the BOM.

General recipe steps are transformed into master recipe operations and general recipeoperations are transformed into master recipe phases. Master recipe operations can bedivided up or combined after the transformation.

General recipe actions and process parameters provide information for master recipeprocess instructions.

The resource assignments are also defined.

The system generates the BOM from the formula of the general recipe or from theformulas of the selected general recipe steps.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Prerequisites:

� You have made the necessary settings for transforming the master recipe.� Make sure that all the master data is in the target system in which you want

to create the master recipe.

� Material master� Classes� Resources� Resource classification� Master inspection characteristics� Inspection methods� Process instruction category and process instruction characteristic

Recipe Transformation in Master Recipes (II)

Figure 149: Recipe Transformation in Master Recipes (II)



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


BOM

� The system generates the BOM from the formula of the general recipe or fromthe formulas of the selected general recipe steps. When the formula is assignedto the process step, the system aggregates the formulas of the steps selected andgenerates the BOM from this aggregated formula.

� The system assigns the material components of the generated BOM to the masterrecipe operations or phases. This depends on the formula components that wereassigned to the steps or operations of the general recipe.

Resources

� The first equipment requirement of the general recipe step provides informationfor the resource selection conditions of the master recipe operation. Theclassification of the equipment requirements of each general recipe step is copiedto the resource selection conditions of the relevant master recipe operation.

� The first equipment requirement of each general recipe step defines the primaryresource of the corresponding master recipe operation. The remaining equipmentrequirements of the general recipe step define the secondary resources for themaster recipe operation.

� The equipment requirements of the general recipe operations define thesecondary resources of the master recipe phases.

� The equipment requirements on the general recipe and process action levels arenot considered in the transformation.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Recipe Transformation in Master Recipes (III)

Figure 150: Recipe Transformation in Master Recipes (III)

Process instructions You can assign process parameters to the general recipe, theprocess step, the process operation, the process action and the equipment requirement.

To transform process parameters into process instructions, you must ensure thatyou have assigned the correct ABAP class to the object type PROCPARA inthe transformation group. You do this in the Customizing for the master recipetransformation, under Define transformation groups. SAP provides the standardABAP class CL_RMXM_ROM_PP.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Process parameters are transformed in the master recipe as follows:

� Process parameters belonging to

(1) Recipe: Assignment to the first phase of the first master recipe operation

Equipment for recipe: no transformation

(2) Process step: Assignment to the first phase of the corresponding masterrecipe operation

(2) Equipment for process step: Assignment to the first phase of thecorresponding master recipe operation

(3) Process operation: Assignment to the corresponding phase

(3) Equipment for process operation: Assignment to the corresponding phase

(4) Process action: Assignment to the superordinate phase

(4) Equipment for process action: Assignment to the superordinate phase



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Describe the basics of recipe management.� Describe the transformation of a general recipe into a master recipe.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Unit Summary

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:� Describe the principle of material costing with a quantity structure.� Describe the principle of the integration of the ECC and SCM (APO) software

components.� Describe the basics of recipe management.� Describe the transformation of a general recipe into a master recipe.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit Summary PLM115



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Test Your Knowledge

1. What data from the Logistics area is used in the material costing with a quantitystructure, and for what purpose?

2. What is the function of inspection lots?

3. Where do you define the selection of master and transaction data that istransferred from ECC and SCM (APO)?

4. Which recipe types are differentiated in the recipe management?



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Answers

1. What data from the Logistics area is used in the material costing with a quantitystructure, and for what purpose?

Answer: The material BOM and the master recipe are used as the quantitystructure to calculate costs for material consumption and the activities.

2. What is the function of inspection lots?

Answer: Inspection lots document the entire inspection process, from inspectionspecifications to inspection results recording, and to the usage decision.

3. Where do you define the selection of master and transaction data that istransferred from ECC and SCM (APO)?

Answer: You define them in an integration model, which you define in ECC.

4. Which recipe types are differentiated in the recipe management?

Answer:

� General recipe (for cross-enterprise product specification)� Site recipes� (Plant-specific) master recipes



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM115 Course Summary

Course SummaryYou should now be able to:

� Creating and managing materials, resources, production versions, master recipes,and material BOMs

� Using engineering change management for recipe approval� Mapping the manufacture of co-products onto the system� Mapping quality inspection during production onto the system� Making important system settings



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Course Summary PLM115



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

FeedbackSAP AG has made every effort in the preparation of this course to ensure the accuracyand completeness of the materials. If you have any corrections or suggestions forimprovement, please record them in the appropriate place in the course evaluation.



plm115 col52 nw

Documents

sap logo

sap course

sap earlywatch

sap archivelink

sap module materials

sap business workflow

express permission of

registered trademarks